Home

Partisol 2300 - User Manual

1. Honeycomb denuder Cap without hole Cap with hole Bottom Top J3 Rotate the denuder 120 degrees along its x axis Cap with hole Cap without hole SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 21 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 Remove the red cap with the hole on it 8 Pour out the excess coating solution into the waste beaker Fig ure 3 32 Figure 3 32 Pour out the excess coating solution into a waste beaker 9 Gently tap the denuder on a stack of Kimwipes Figure 3 33 This will ensure that there are no liquid bubbles inside the tubes of the denuder SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 22 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 33 Gently tap the open end of the denuder on a stack of clean Kimwipes to remove any liquid bubbles in the denuder tubes 10 Remove the other red cap that does not have the hole from the end of the denuder 11 Gently tap the denuder into the waste beaker to remove any remaining coating solution from the denuder 12 Turn on the clean air drying system Figure 3 1 13 Wipe the outer surfac
2. Volume 0 0 1 SCV 0 0 ID1 W W ID2 W Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat DwnLoad SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 9 4 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Rec Channel Cartridge ID Volume CV ID1 ID2 Revision A 000 The Rec field in the upper right hand corner of the screen contains the number of the current record This field displays the flow channel for the record number that is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen This field displays the Cartridge ID number for the record number that is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen The Volume field indicates the total sample volume volumetric m that has passed through the filter The coefficient of variation is equal to the standard deviation of the 5 minute flow rate averages divided by the average flow rate 10 l min by default This value is then multiplied by 100 to yield the percent CV value Ifthe figure is greater than 2 2 the sampler displays a status code Section 8 1 The ID1 and ID2 fields are the site identification numbers as entered in the Site Identification screen Section 5 1 Press lt F3 MoreDat gt to display the Cartridge Data Status Codes screen Press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen 9 1 3 CARTRIDGE Data Status CODES SCREEN Press lt F3 MoreDat gt when in the Filter Data screen to enter the Cartridge Data Status Code
3. Figure 12 6 Audit Direc tions screen Stat OK Partisol 2300 Mode AUDT Press MENU key to go to the audit screen or to perform a leak check Press any key to continue 3 While in the Audit Directions screen press any key to continue This will display the Audit Menu screen Figure 12 7 SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Pace 12 3 Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 12 7 Audit Menu screen gt Audit System Check System Maintenance 4 While in the Audit Menu screen press the down arrow J until gt Audit is selected Press lt ENTER gt The unit will then display the Audit screen Figure 12 4 5 When you have completed your audit procedures press lt RUN STOP gt to resume sampling 12 1 3 VERIFYING THE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Follow these steps to verify the ambient air temperature 1 2 3 Ensure that the Audit screen Figure 12 4 is displayed on the sampler s keypad Determine the current temperature C at the ambient tempera ture sensor using an external thermometer C 5 9 x F 32 Verify that the value of Amb Temp displayed in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature If this is not the case perform the ambient temperature calibration procedure described in the Service Manual 12 1 4 VERIFYING THE AMBIENT PRE
4. e ceeeseeeeeeceeeneecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 12 1 12 1 1 Entering the Service Mode Stop Mode 05 12 1 12 1 2 Entering the Service Mode Wait or Sampling Modes 12 3 12 1 3 Verifying the Ambient Air Temperature 0 ee 12 4 12 1 4 Verifying the Ambient Pressure 0 cccccccsceeseeeeeeees 12 4 1213 WIA MG ccs ht atc aa Sets tal cine a a aE i aa ETETEN 12 5 12 1 6 Verifying the Flow Rates wisccecicciciscis sieseaenentetavcntoorsevauicnune 12 6 12 2 Routine Maintenance Procedures eeeeeereeeeeeeee 12 7 12 2 1 ChemComb Maintenance siccicccsunssonaciacmadesrmsicunecranennsnnals 12 7 12 2 2 Other Routine Maintenance ssssseeeeeenreeerernreeneenne een 12 7 SECTION 13 RESETTING THE SAMPLER si2 scstscsatideneiesidadansardcrnive Wedraseeteates 13 1 13 1 Resetting Operating Parameters s ssssssssssssrrrriesesrereesresseeere 13 1 13 2 Sampler Default Settings cseceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeneees 13 1 13 3 Resetting Data Storage cis nisiisctissaciiacnsesrmntuateancceimaniantansavennt 13 2 13 4 Resetting Low and High Passwords 2 cceeseeseeeet 13 3 13 5 Resetting All Instrument Parameters 222 ccseeeeee 13 3 SECTION 14 SERVICE MENU cceccecccecccecceccceceeecceeceeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeens 14 1 14 1 Entering the Service Mode c ccc c cccccseeeeeesseeceteeeeeneeees 14 1 14 2 Leaving the Service Mode vacsi
5. SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 19 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Stop Sample The Stop Sample parameter defines the time and date that the unit will stop sampling for the group number displayed in the Group field at the top of the screen When editing treat each part of the time and date as a separate field In the Browse Mode the soft function keys lt F2 Prev gt and lt F3 Next gt are used to move to the previous or next group number The lt F1 Times gt key displays the Filter Times screen Section 7 3 7 Pressing lt F5 More gt will access the lt F6 gt to lt F10 gt function keys The lt F4 Reset gt key will reset current settings for all groups to their default settings as defined in the Sample Setup screen The lt F8 Hour gt and lt F9 Day gt keys are used to increment the Start Sample or Stop Sample times by one hour or one day respectively Pressing lt F10 Back gt will restore the original lt F1 gt to lt F5 gt functions In the Edit Mode the soft function keys are lt F1 List gt lt F2 List gt and lt F3 Bksp gt NOTE If the Partisol Speciation Sampler has been pro grammed for fewer sampling cycles than available cartridges the unit will continue to sample using the entered program s and then revert to the default sampling program Sampling will continue with any additional cartridges using the default program settings as ent
6. the unit will stop sampling on the present group of cartridges and enter the Wait Operating Mode The unit will then continue sampling on the next group of cartridges at the designated time using the parameters set for that group Ifa flow error occurs when the flow error mode is set to NEXT the unit will stop Pace 7 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler sampling on the present group of cartridges and enter the Wait Operating Mode The unit will then continue sampling on the next group of cartridges at the designated time However the unit will use the sampling parameters for the previous group of cartridges that had its sampling run interrupted You can only set the flow error mode to NEXT when the unit is programmed to use the BASIC TIME or TIME sampling programs Section 7 3 NOTE If you set the flow error mode to NEXT and a flow error occurs then your last scheduled sampling run will not occur For example if you have three groups of cartridges Groups 1 3 scheduled to sample with the flow error mode set to NEXT and a flow error occurs then the Group 3 cartridges will not sample during the times that you have set Continuous Sampling When this feature is turned on the unit will sample until the user presses lt RUN STOP gt When the last user defined group of cartridges finishes sampling if there are more cartridges installed on
7. 2 and 3 Each small hose is labeled at the top and the bottom Match the labels at the bottom of each small hose with the hose barbs located on the top of the unit labeled 4 2 and 3 and slide the hose ends over the appropriate hose barbs Figures 2 58 and 2 59 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 31 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 58 Match the labels at the bottom of each small hose with the hose barbs located on the top of the unit Figure 2 59 Slide the hose ends over the appropriate hose barbs 23 Attach the top of the small hoses to the bank valve Slide hose 1 over the top hose barb located on the left side of the bank valve Slide hose 2 over the middle hose barb and slide hose 3 over the bottom hose barb Figure 2 60 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 32 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 60 Attach the top of the small hoses to the bank valve al 24 Attach the flow channel hoses to the hose barbs located on the back of the shelter boxes with flow channels 1A 1D and 2A 2D Inside each shelter box the flow channels are labeled 1A 1D and 2A 2D Figure 2 40 Match the labels on the white hoses to the proper flow channels and slide the hoses over the hose barbs on the back of the shelter boxes Figures 2 61 and 2 62 N a Figure 2 61 Match t
8. oe e ORRERA oe k 2 digit Channel Number as fs o o Number of current status conditions defined by RS Para 2 et Bi variable whose value is being Program Register Code of PT requested The PRC may be 1 to 3 the variable whose value is characters long and is not right being requested The PRC filled in the response may be up to 3 digits long Do not right fill if the PRC is eer oe referenced by the Ask Register command NOTE This value can be of varying APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler AK Protocol Ask Register Command AREG continued Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 3 APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler AK Protocol Enter Register Command EREG COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 52 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in RS Para 2 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from instrument In this case lt CR gt and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and
9. v Press lt RUN STOP gt in Main screen Wait WAIT gt Revision A 000 Define Sampling Program Select the sampling program in the Sample Setup screen Install the cartridges prior to sampling Initiate Sampling Program After defining the sampling program press lt RUN STOP gt to initiate the program The system then enters the Wait or Sampling Operating Modes Wait to Begin Collection The sampler stays in the Wait Operating Mode until the sampling Sampler enters the Wait Operating Mode conditions are met Operating Mode after the current cartridge stop time has arrived It then waits for the next sampling start time to occur Sampling SAMP Operating Mode Sample Collection The sampler remains in the Sampling Operating Mode with the current cartridge until the next Stop Time is reached The sampler then enters the Wait Operating Mode when switching to the next cartridge Note To suspend the current system operation in the Wait or Sampling Operating Modes to perform an audit press lt RUN STOP gt and select lt Audit gt To resume sampling press lt RUN STOP gt Press lt RUN STOP gt in Main screen v Audit Audit Operating Mode l Done DONE Operating Mode t Error ERR Operating Mode v Y Press
10. 749 0 0 0 Amb RH 29 5 0 0 0 00 FlowCal I O Cal Function Keys in Browse Mode FlowCal I O Cal Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Revision A 000 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 26 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 62 ADC Chan nels screen in low level system info Service Mode Figure A 63 DAC Chan nels screen in low level system info Service Mode Stat OK ADC Channels Mode SVC MFC 1 0 1 039 PmpFan T 8 2 977 MFC 2 1 1 018 Humidity 9 1 447 MFC 3 2 1 089 Amb Pres 10 4 019 MFC 4 3 1 021 Cal Ref 11 0 024 Pump T 4 2 983 Elec T 12 3 043 Amb T 5 2 983 User 1 13 0 00 Wind Dir 6 0 002 User 2 14 0 00 Wind Spd 7 0 002 User 3 15 0 00 D A Discrte TPIC RTC Stat OK DAC Channels Mode SVC MFC 1 0 1 115 4 0 000 MFC 2 1 1 000 User 1 5 0 000 MFC 3 2 1 000 User 2 6 0 000 MFC 4 3 1 000 User 3 7 0 000 A D Discrte TPIC RTC Function Keys in Browse Mode A D Discrte TPIC RTC Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Revision A 000 Pace A 27 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 64 Discrete I O screen in low level system info Service Mode Figure A 65 TPIC Chan nels screen in low level system info Service Mode
11. FTS Pressure T O N 112 Streamline FTP Constant m z gt 113 Streamline FTP Constant b 114 Ambient Temperature Calibration Reading 50 80 115 Ambient Temperature Offset 10 10 116 Ambient Pressure Calibration Reading 500 900 117 Ambient Pressure Offset 15 15 1 Ambient Rel Humidity Calibration Reading 0 100 18 E APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 7 GRDORRBBREE O 1 N N N 15 15 e 2 5 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 5 20 5 20 5 20 i 5 20 0 25 0 25 0 20 me 122 123 24 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 125 149 128 Current Flow A Standard Vmin N A 129 Current Flow B Standard Imin N A 130 Current Flow C Standard Vmin N A 131 Current Flow D Standard N A o ael 132 Current Electronics Compartment Temperature 133 Current Ambient Temperature o Q 1 a 134 Average Ambient Temperature 135 Current Ambient Pressure 136 Average Ambient Pressure 137 Current Ambient Relative Humidity 138 Average Ambient Relative Humidity x 139 Current Pump Compartment Temperature o o pp 140 Current Fan Inlet Temperature 141 Current Wind Direction 142 Average Wind Direction Q oO va 1 Current Wind Speed k 43 n APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 8 z 47 148 149 0 8
12. NOTE ABOUT MULTIPLE PRC CODES lf more than 1 Program Register Code is specified in RS Para 3 byte 5 of the reponse transmission is either 2 or 3 and bytes 7 to 36 are repeated for each Program Register Code Pace C 12 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler VY Record system calibra tion constants before upgrading the software Appendix D Installing New System Software This appendix describes the steps involved in loading new system software into the Partisol Speciation Sampler The Partisol Speciation is equipped with flash memory which allows its operating program to be downloaded from a PC Before updating the software record the values of calibration constants stored in the T O Calibration Sensor Calibration Ambient Temperature Calibration and Flow Calibration screens in the sampler s Service Mode Section 14 Some of the sampler s operational settings also may need to be reentered as a result of the software download D 1 LOADING Software INTo FLASH Memory The software that operates the Partisol Speciation Sampler is stored in flash memory It is not necessary to make any hardware changes to revise the software Rather the operating program is loaded into the sampler s RS232 port from a personal computer PC Follow the procedure below to download new system software into the device 1 Record all of your unit s calibration constants offset and span from its
13. Stat OK Discrete I O Mode SVC Minl OFF MIn2 ON MFC4 OFF Sys0 ON Sys1 ON ID3 OFF ID2 OFF ID1 ON G2 OFF G1 ON SRIN ON SCLR ON RCK OFF SRCK OFF Dpb6 OFF Dpb7 OFF Mux1 ON Mux2 ON Mux3 ON Mux4 ON Dpc4 OFF Dpc5 0FF Dpc6 0FF Dpc7 O0FF KbRO ON KbR1 ON KbR2 ON KbR3 ON KbR4 ON Upa5 OFF Upa6 OFF Upa7 OFF Spkr OFF AORly OFF AIRly OFF Pole ON Usr1 OFF Usr2 OFF FPGA OFF Flash OFF KbCO ON KbC1 ON KbC2 ON KbC3 ON KbC4 ON MFC1 OFF MFC2 OFF MFC3 OFF A D D A MUX TPIC ON OFF Stat OK TPIC Channels Mode SVC LedLight ON Bank1 OFF LEAK OFF ElecHeat OFF Bank2 OFF DRN17 OFF Pump1 ON Bank3 OFF DRN18 OFF Pump2 ON Vacuum OFF DRN19 OFF PumpHeat OFF Vacuum2 OFF DRN20 OFF Status OFF DRN13 OFF DRN21 OFF PumpFan2 ON DRN14 OFF DRN22 0OFF PumpFan1 0ON DRN15 OFF DRN23 OFF A D D A Discrte ON OFF RTC APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Revision A 000 Pace A 28 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 66 Multiplexed Inputs screen in low level Stat OK Multiplexed Inputs system info Service Mode 0 ON 1 ON 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON 5 ON 6 ON 7 ON 8 ON 9 ON 10 ON 11 ON 12 ON 13 ON 14 ON 15 ON A D D A Discrte TPIC ON OFF Figure A 67 Real Time Clockscreeniin ow level ptaboOk Real Time Clank Mode SVC system info Service Mode Cur Tame 01 13 33 New Time 01 13 00 Cur Date 99 11 04 New Date 99 11
14. The function keys soft keys labeled F1 to F5 activate the commands shown on the bottom line of almost every screen in the system The following parts of this section describe how to navigate among the system s software screens and how to switch between the Browse Mode and Edit Mode to change the system s parameters 5 4 NAVIGATING AMONG SCREENS The system software allows the user to navigate easily through the use of soft function keys lt F1 gt to lt F5 gt and the lt ESC gt key Figure 5 6 From the Main screen press i lt F1 StCode gt lt F2 Stats gt lt F3 System gt lt F4 Sample gt or lt F5 Data gt to drop down Use the function keys to a h k h drop down by one layer in one level in the screen structure Figure 5 5 Pressing the lt ESC gt ey causes the the structure of screens current display to be replaced by the next higher screen in the hierarchy For example Pressing lt ESC gt returns the pressing lt ESC gt when in the Status Codes screen returns the user to the Main screen user to the next highest The definitions of the soft function keys changes as different screens appear on the level display and different functions are required SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 5 5 Hierarchy of screens Title screen Main screen a Temperature Filter Data Status Cod
15. ab 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 3 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 4 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 StCode Stats System Sample Data With the occurrence of any status conditions the unit will display the single or double letter abbreviation for the situation that applies The sampler also provides secondary indicators of the unit s current status conditions through the use of two status lights One light is located next to the I O connectors inside the unit s enclosure The other light is mounted on the outside enclosure and located on the top left side of the unit If the unit s current status code is OK the indicator lights do not light up If the unit reports a noncritical status code it will turn on the lights If the unit reports a critical status code the lights will blink on and off continuously The Status Codes screen Figure 8 2 displays a list and description of the currently active status conditions When in the Main screen press lt F1 StCode gt to enter the Status Codes screen SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION Pace 8 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 8 2 Status Codes screen OK OK No Status Conditions Status Codes STOP Reset The following list details the system s status codes and definitions SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION OK M No current status condit
16. bytes are optional ee o lt CRC gt High byte followed by low byte of CRC The CRC s may be replaced by a single lt CR gt character instrument as specified by RS Para 3 May be 01 02 or 03 lt space gt lt space gt Space po 3 digit instrument identifier as defined by RS Para 1 This code increments by one for each variable transmitted When PRC 2 ia 0 then the response from the instrument is RS Para 5 if RS Para 5 holds a value If RS Para 5 0 then the response is RS Para 1 1 When PRC 3 0 then the response from the instrument is RS Para 6 if RS Para 6 holds a value If RS Para 6 0 then the response is RS Para 1 2 lt space gt lt space gt Space DEFINITION OF CRC BYTES tor Value of variable being transmitted in the format The CRC bytes above bytes 8 and 9 are the NNNN EE hexidecimal representation of the exclusive or of bytes 1 to 7 The high byte of the CRC is transmitted as byte 8 and the low byte is sent as byte 9 For example a value of 63 7 is represented as If a syntax error exists or lt the value of the variable is 0 the instrument returns 0000 00 APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler German Network Protocol continued Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument CURRENT OPERATING MODE Bytes 20 21 Stop Wait Samp
17. which may be either None or Xon Xoff None is the default This field contains the manner in which the RS232 port is used according to the following categories None The serial port is not currently defined for any communication The unit must reside in this mode to download a new version of the system operating software into its Flash memory Appendix D AK With the unit in this protocol the RS232 serial port is configured for two way serial communication using the AK communication protocol Appendix C This selection makes use of RS232 parameters to 3 listed in the RS232 Setup screen Figure 10 3 Storage With the unit in this protocol the user can down load information from the sampler s data storage buffers Pace 10 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This protocol allows only one way transmission from the unit to another device To retrieve data from the unit in this protocol you must have a software program such as Hyper Terminal or Pro Comm Plus already installed on your PC that will capture the data RealTime When in this protocol the unit downloads user defined comma delimited records of information defined by time intervals The user defines the program register codes PRCs see Appendix B of the variables to be down loaded in the RS232 RealTime Data screen Figure 10 5 in the Data 1 to Data 12 fields To reach this screen press
18. 1 hose clip plate 4 side bracket plates 1 ChemComb shelter box 1 shelter roof and associated hardware 2 Slide each leg onto the studs on the top of the sampler Figures 2 7 and 2 8 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 7 Stud on top of unit Figure 2 8 Shelter leg on stud 3 Using the hardware provided one 1 1 4 20 nut for each support post secure the shelter legs to the sampler Figure 2 9 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 9 Securing the shelter leg to the unit 4 Attach the hose assembly mounting plate to the two rear legs on the sampler Figure 2 10 with two 2 1 4 20 x 1 2 socket screws and two 2 1 4 20 nuts Figure 2 10 Hose assem bly mounting plate positioned on the shelter legs SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 5 Secure the hose assembly mounting plate to the legs Be sure to hold each screw with a screwdriver Figure 2 11 while turning the nuts with a nut driver Figure 2 12 Figure 2 11 Securing the hose assembly mounting plate to the shelter legs F SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 8 Figure 2 12 Holding the screw with a screwdriver while turning the nut Revision A 000
19. C for 30 seconds If the sample pump does initiate due to low temperatures it stops running when the ambient temperature exceeds 7 5 C In this case the flow through the pump enters the system through the vacuum vent valve Ifthe temperature measured on the interface board drops below 10 C for 30 seconds the heater in the electronics compartment initiates and runs until the temperature exceeds 10 C 2 5 ADJUSTING THE Liquip CrysTaL DispLay LCD A knob on the right side of the display keypad adjusts the contrast of the sampler s liquid crystal display LCD Figure 2 72 This knob may be turned clockwise and counterclockwise SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 40 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 72 LCD contrast adjustment knob on right side of display keypad SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 41 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 42 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Section 3 Denuder Filter and Cartridge Preparation This section explains how to prepare the Honeycomb HC denuders for use in the ChemComb cartridges and how to maintain and clean the cartridges This section also explains how to perform the initial inspection and the equilibration and weighing before and after sampling of t
20. H 5A0 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 29 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler B 3 7 DECIPHERING Status CODES When downloaded the Partisol Speciation Sampler s PRC 5 Status Codes are displayed in hexadecimal form The sampler may display more than one code at at time When the unit does show more than one status code it adds the codes together and displays them as a hexadecimal sum For example if the unit displays the Flash Memory status code hexadecimal number H 1 Section B 2 and the System Reset Occurred status code hexadecimal number H 4 at the same time the two status codes when downloaded will be displayed as the hexadecimal number 5 In Section B 2 the PRC 5 Status Code table has only two status codes that would add up to a value of 5 By looking at this table and breaking down the downloaded status codes you will be able to decipher which status codes the unit has displayed To properly use the PRC 5 Status Code table you must separate the status codes on the table into place holders the one s ten s 100 s 1 000 s 10 000 s and 100 000 s and the 1 000 000 s place To break down the downloaded status codes you must match each section of the status code with these place holders See Examples B 10 and B 11 for assistance with deciphering hexadecimal status codes APPENDIX B PROGRAM R
21. Sample gt to enter the Sample Setup screen Section 7 2 2 Press lt EDIT gt choose your sam pling program and enter the start time sampling duration and sample repeat time for your sampling run s Press lt ENTER gt to save these changes Pace 6 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 10 While in the Sample Setup screen press lt F1 Options gt to enter the Sample Options screen Section 7 2 3 Press lt EDIT gt and choose the Flow Error Mode and the Continuous Sampling and System Check options Press lt ENTER gt to save these changes and then lt ESC gt to return to the Sample Setup screen 11 While in the Sample Setup screen press lt F2 Group gt to enter the Group Setup screen Section 7 2 4 Press lt EDIT gt and choose the group and channel options for your sampling run Press lt EN TER gt to save these changes and then lt ESC gt to return to the Sample Setup screen 12 While in the Sample Setup screen press lt F3 ChanLst gt to enter the Cartridge List Setup screen Section 7 3 8 Check the flow channel cartridge grouping and flow rates for each cartridge in your sample run in this screen Then press lt EDIT gt and enter the cartridge identification numbers Cartridge ID field Press lt EN TER gt to save these changes and then lt ESC gt to return to the Sample Setup screen 13 While in the Sample Setup screen press lt F4 SampSet gt to enter the spec
22. format 10 9 10 10 input 1 3 9 1 9 9 10 1 interval 1 3 9 1 9 8 logger 9 1 output 10 1 storage 9 1 10 1 viewing 6 2 9 1 default settings 13 1 denuders Honeycomb coating 3 14 gas extraction 3 24 installation 4 5 preparation 3 11 removal 4 7 display keypad 2 40 Done Mode 7 3 downloading data 6 2 10 2 10 6 10 7 E EC compliance V EDIT key 5 8 Edit Mode 5 8 5 9 5 10 editing 5 9 5 10 electric supply 2 1 ENTER key 5 11 EPISODIC Mode 7 25 equipment lab 3 1 equipment rating IV Error Mode 7 4 ESC key 5 6 F features advanced 1 2 filter data 1 3 8 4 8 5 9 1 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 equilibration 3 30 3 33 exchange 4 1 handling 3 29 inspection 3 29 log E l preparation 3 29 type 7 28 weighing 3 30 3 34 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index continued filter pack 4 stage 1 2 3 32 assembly 4 5 disassembly 4 9 filter pack outlet port 4 1 4 5 flash memory 8 2 D 1 flow rates 1 7 8 5 schematic 1 6 verification 6 7 12 6 flow channels 1 1 7 11 7 28 grouping 1 1 5 3 7 11 shut off 7 28 flow rates maximum 7 16 setting 7 28 7 30 function keys 5 6 G German Ambient Network Protocol C 10 glass spacers 3 10 glass wool preparation 3 4 grease impactor plates 3 9 grouping flow channels 1 1 5 3 7 11 H hardware configuration 2 1 hardware considerations 2 40 hardware installation 2 1 hardware stand 2 38 HDPE spacers 3 10 hexadeci
23. monitor is in the Edit Mode Press the arrow keys lt T gt lt l gt lt gt and lt gt gt to select the field to be edited In the Edit Mode many screens suchas the System Setup screen Figure 5 9 contain soft function keys that will decrease lt List gt and increase lt List gt the value of the parameter currently being edited These keys zepea z when held down and also accelerate to a faster decrementing or incrementing speed when depressed for a longer period of time Users may also enter numeric values directly from the keypad The lt Bksp gt back space soft function key erases the previously typed character when in the Edit Mode To change the sign of numeric values to make a positive number negative or a negative number positive use the ChSign key that is available on many screens in the Edit Mode To use this feature first enter the required number on the keypad and then press the lt ChSign gt soft function key Times are expressed as hours minutes seconds by default and can be edited using the lt List gt and lt List gt keys or through direct keypad entry For the purposes of editing the time variable is split into three separate fields hours minutes and seconds Use the arrow keys on the keypad lt lt gt and lt gt gt to move from one part of the time variable to another Dates are expressed as year month day by default and are edited as three separa
24. options TmpPres Flow User IO Wind SysStat Master Menu Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage Service Mode System I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 18 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 44 Master Menu screen with sampling setup options Figure A 45 Master Menu screen with data storage options Figure A 46 Master Menu screen with service menu option Master Menu Status Codes System Status System Setup gt Sampling Setup Data Storage Service Mode Sample Options Group ChanLst SampSet Master Menu Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup gt Data Storage Service Mode FiltDat InptDat IntvDat Master Menu Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage gt Service Mode APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Service Menu Screen System Maintenance Routines Audit Screen Manual Motion Tests Temperatures Screen Leak Check Screen Flow Valves Pump Screen User Misc Screen Calibration Flow Calibration Screen Low Level System Info I O Calib Screen Sensor Calib Screen Revision A 000 ADC Channels
25. temperature cable plugged into the Ambient Tempera ture connector 4 ANEMOMETER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 37 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 70 Partisol stand components 2 3 PARTISOL STAND The Partisol stand 57 004644 keeps the Partisol Speciation Sampler s ChemComb cartridges at the appropriate height WARNING If the Partisol Speciation Sampler is mounted on a stand it could fall or tip over in high wind conditions if the stand is not properly anchored Follow these steps to assemble the Partisol Speciation Sampler s stand NOTE Figures 2 70 and 2 71 contain a list of parts and assembly information for the stand Put this hardware to gether in accordance with the diagram shown in this figure IMPORTANT Always remember to place the split ring washer between the head of the bolt and the washer 1 Assemble the bottom of the stand by laying out the front back and sides 2 Place one leg on each inside corner fasten with F G and H hard ware 3 Attach the top front and back to the outside of the legs with F G and H hardware Do not tighten 4 Fasten the right and left rails to the legs and top front and back rails with F G and H hardware SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 38 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler RUPPRECHT amp PATASHNICK CO INC PA
26. 0 10 0 17 0 12 0 10 Pres Amb 756 Vac 000 Start Function Keys in Browse Mode Start Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 23 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler aaa en HL a Stat OK Temperatures Mode SVC tests Service Mode Pump Ambient Elec Temp 25 1 C Temp 25 1C Temp 30 7C FanT 24 6 C Pres 749mmHg Heater OFF Fanl ON RH 29 7 Fan2 ON WSpd 0 1 Heater OFF WDir 0 ON OFF FlowVal Misc Function Keys in Browse Mode ON OFF FlowVal Misc Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ite soe Siesta Stat OK Flows Valves Pump motion tests Service SetFlow CurFlow Max Mode A 0 0 0 00 20 0 Vacuum OFF B 0 0 0 10 20 0 Leak OFF C 0 0 0 50 20 0 Pumpl ON D 0 0 0 12 20 0 Pump2 ON Bank 1 OFF Bank 2 OFF Bank 3 OFF Temps ON OFF Misc More Function Keys in Browse Mode Temps ON OFF Misc More Close Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Back Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Revision A 000 Pace A 24 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler aes pai ee Stat OK User Misc Mode SVC tests Service Mode A I A O Misc Analog Calib 1 0 00 0 000 Stat OFF InRly OFF 2 0 00 0 000 LCD ON RefIN 0 025 3 0 00 0 000 Spkr OFF
27. 00 0 00 Logic Output 1 OFF Logic Output 2 OFF TmpPres Flow Wind SysStat The User I O Statistics screen contains the following information Analog Inputs 1 2 3 Logic Outputs 1 2 This field contains the current and latest averaged values of user defined analog inputs 1 2 and 3 engineering units Refer to Section 10 for addi tional information This field contains the current values of user de fined logic outputs 1 and 2 VDC Refer to Section 10 4 for additional information on logical output settings Press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen from the User I O Statistics screen 8 2 4 Wino Statistics SCREEN The Wind Statistics screen Figure 8 6 displays the wind speed wind velocity and wind direction values The averages correspond to the values computed over the latest completed averaging storage interval as defined by the Average Time parameter in the System Setup screen Section 7 2 1 These values only have meaning if an optional wind vane anemometer 59 004953 is attached to the sampler Baile oy MRICS Sean LOK Wind Stats Mode STOP screen Current Average Wind Speed 0 1 0 1 km h Wind Velocity N A 0 0 km h Wind Direction 0 0 deg TmpPres Flow User IO SysStat SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION Pace 8 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 8 7 System Statistics screen The Wind Statistics screen contains t
28. 000cseesseecessseeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeeeeees 10 1 10 1 System Setup WO Screen cctcciscceccsel socatee sect eedecsnavenseteeieanedae 10 1 10 2 Downloading Stored Data ins ciccicicsiisccccsttcvsstecncsnntansexasevenes 10 2 10 2 1 RS232 Setup Screen essees einsa E 10 2 10 2 2 Downloading Data from the Sampler s 10 6 10 2 3 Download Data SCreen ccccceeceeee eee teeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 10 7 10 3 Format of Filter Data Records c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeee 10 9 10 4 Format of Interval Data Records eeseeeeeeeeeeeteees 10 10 10 5 Format of Input Data Records 0 cece eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 10 10 10 65 Analog Input CONVERSIONS ss tciccxtenezedaterterrdioehiacinianicemiedteesins 10 11 10 7 Analog Voltage Output aixiaicl ate ncetthes te dened dabaatdiecatdeatadaecnane 10 12 Pace XI Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Table of Contents continued 10 8 RS485 Input Output ec cee cece cece eee eeeeeeeeseseseseeeeeseneeees 10 14 10 9 Logic Level OUND UN aie ce iste searnnactimatcesnancuninetemnatanmnasboneseaindtigian 10 15 SECTION 11 PASSWORD PROTECTION sixexsiscinssnatnexcisnannseicamuiisxaneuriunsacauasaes 11 1 11 1 Password Protection terina a 11 1 11 2 Resetting Low and High Passwords n 11 4 SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 12 1 12 1 Verification Procedures
29. 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended om eee een p me oe 2 e 2 a oe Enter Register command es Le 4 digit Enter Register command a 7 lt space gt Space Ea lt space gt lt space gt Space 2 digit Channel Number as defined Number of current status by RS Para 2 conditions E OCT I a variable whose value was entered Program Register Code of the EAEE The PRC may be 1 to 3 characters long and is not right filled in the variable whose value is being entered The PRC may be up to 3 ee response digits long Do not right fill if the ES of the response transmission New value to be entered for e according to the entry for RS Para variable referenced by Program Register Code in bytes 11 to 13 above NOTE The value entered may be of varying length APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler AK Protocol Set Function Command SFxx COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 52 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in RS Para 2 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from instrument In this case lt CR gt and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are
30. 04 RTC Adjustment 4 0 seconds day Set New Time and New Date to a time in the future then press SetTime when the actual real time equals new time A D D A Discrte TPIC SetTime Function Keys in Browse Mode A D D A Discrte TPIC SetTime Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Figure A 68 Download System Log screen Service Mode Service Menu About to start data download Press any key to continue APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 29 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 30 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Appendix B Program Register Codes This appendix contains a listing of the program register codes PRCs used in the operating software of the Partisol Speciation Sampler These codes come into play when the unit s two way serial communication capability Appendix C is employed to request the current value of variables to change the value of certain system parameters and to download data from the system s internal data logger Because the sampler uses the hexadecimal number system for some of its status codes this section also explains how to add and subtract hexadecimal numbers and how to decipher the sampler s hexadecimal status codes APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER COD
31. 2 3 or during a leak check procedure OA OD Coefficient of Variation A D The coefficient of variation of the sample flow rate s expressed as a percentage was greater than 2 2 during sampling User Pressed Stop The user pressed the lt RUN STOP gt button during sampling B1 B3 Bank 7 3 Failed The sampler encountered a mechanical problem with Bank 1 3 This status code will register only when the System Check feature is turned on Section 7 2 3 or during a leak check procedure LA LD Leak Check A D Failed This error code will appear if the leak check on the indicated flow channel A D failed A leak check fails Pace 8 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler if the vacuum created in the sampling system leaks at a rate of 25 mm Hg or greater which is equal to the maximum leak rate of 80 ml min that is indicated as acceptable by the U S EPA This status code will register only when the System Check feature is turned on Section 7 2 3 or during a leak check procedure D Audit Performed This status condition indicates to the user that an audit was performed during sampling It does zo indicate an error It is for information purposes only In the case of multiple status conditions the sampler displays the single or double letter codes for each status condition in the status field of the Main screen and other screens that have a status condition field For example th
32. 2 millibars or 760 mm Hg The instrument uses the measured ambient temperature and pressure to sample at the correct volumetric flow rate Using this information the microprocessor calculates the correct mass flow set point Flow Rate required to achieve the desired volumetric flow setting STP 273 15 Ave Pres Flow Rate p Flow Rate x x Ave Temp 273 15 760 Pace 1 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Ambient temp sensor Microprocessor Mass flow controller PM 2 5 impactor Inlet 16 7 l min annodized t Mass and elements Mass flow controller Empty filter holder Mass flow controller Empty filter holder Empty filter holder Empty filter holder Empty filter holder Nylon filter Quartz filter opt Quartz filter Spacer Sodium carbonate denuder PM 2 5 impactor PM 2 5 impactor Inlet 10 I min annodized Particulate nitrate particulate sulfate other ions Inlet 10 I min PTFE coated t Organic carbon elemental carbon Mass flow controller Empty filter holder Quartz filter opt Quartz filter Empty filter holder PM 2 5 impactor Inlet 16 7 l min PTFE coated t Organic carbon elemental carbon Sampler enclosure External cover Ambient pres t sensor Figure 1 2 Flow schematic for the Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SE
33. 3 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 5 Honeycomb System housing for the ChemComb cartridge 3 2 2 CoaTinG THE GLass WooL Follow these steps to coat the glass wool used in the clean air system NOTE Be sure to wear plastic gloves while coating the glass wool 1 Dip the clean soft Pyrex glass wool Corning catalog number 3950 in the coating solution The coating solution is either 2 citric acid monohydrate in alcohol or 2 sodium carbonate in alcohol 2 Squeeze out the excess solution 3 Partially separate the glass wool fibers and lay them out on clean trays to dry 4 When dry store the coated glass wool in a clean container 3 2 3 CHeEmComs System Housinc You must wipe the ChemComb System housing Figure 3 5 with alcohol to clean off any oil residue Wipe it with Milli Q water and dry it in room air SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 6 Bottom view of a PTFE coated inlet Figure 3 7 left Side view of a PTFE coated 10 l min inlet Figure 3 8 right Side view of an annodized 10 l min inlet 3 2 4 TEFLON CoATED INLETS You must thoroughly rinse new inlets Figures 3 6 through 3 10 with Milli Q water Allow them to dry covered with Kimwipes in room air Store the clean dry inlets on Kimwipe covered trays with additional Ki
34. 3 6 PReE SAMPLING FILTER WEIGHING Follow these steps to weigh the 47 mm collection filters tare weight before sampling 1 Ensure that each filter has been equilibrated for at least 24 hours before weighing 2 Filters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of at least 1 ug 0 001 mg Be sure to warm up the balance before weighing filters 3 Weigh each filter at least once three times recommended re cording the mass in grams Figure 3 42 The average mass reading is the initial filter weight W g Use appropriate tech niques to neutralize static charges on the filter This SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 31 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler pre sampling weighing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period 4 Unlatch the top rim of the ChemComb cartridge and separate it from the body housing Figure 3 43 Figure 3 43 Top rim of the ChemComb cartridge separated from the body housing 5 Place the filter inside a plastic filter screen Figures 3 44 and 3 45 Figure 3 44 left Plastic filter screen for 47 mm filters Figure 3 45 right 47 mm filter installed in a plastic filter screen SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 32 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 6 Place this filter and plastic filter screen face down on the top rim of th
35. 4 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 StCode Stats System Sample Data Figure A 4 Status Codes screen OK Status Codes STOP OK No Status Conditions Reset APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 5 Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen Stat OK Temp Pressure Mode STOP Current Average Ambient Temp 21 3 28 6 C Ambient Pres 754 741 mmHg Ambient RH 28 3 48 3 Flow User IO Wind SysStat Figure A 6 Flow Statistics elon Stat OK Flow Stats Mode STOP Flow Setpoint Current Volume Time A 0 0 1 m 0 2 1 m 0 0 1 0 B 0 0 1 m 0 1 l m 0 0 1 0 c 0 0 1 m 0 4 1 m 0 0 1 0 D 0 0 1 m 0 1 l m 0 0 1 0 TmpPres User IO Wind SysStat E ai aE Stat OK User I O Mode STOP Current Average Analog Input 1 0 00 0 00 Analog Input 2 0 00 0 00 Analog Input 3 0 00 0 00 Logic Output 1 OFF Logic Output 2 OFF TmpPres Flow Wind SysStat APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 8 Wind Statistics screen Stat OK Wind Stats Mode STOP Current Average Wind Speed 0 1 0 1 km h Wind Velocity N A 0 0 km h Wind Direction 0 0 deg TmpPres Flow User IO SysStat F an das saa Stat OK System Stats Mode STOP El
36. 5 21 Sample on Group 6 22 Sample on Group 7 23 Sample on Group 8 24 Sample on Group 9 25 Sample on Group 10 26 Sample on Group 11 27 Sample on Group 12 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 17 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler PRC 172 Flow Mode 0 1 2 Err Wait Next Revision A 000 Error Mode Wait Mode Next Mode PRC 219 220 221 Sampling Conditions 1 2 3 OANIDNBWNFK O jmi jn APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES AI AILAVE AI2AVE AIBAVE None Ambient Temperature C Ambient Pressure mmHg Ambient Relative Humidity Wind Speed km h Wind Dir deg Analog Input 1 Engineering Units Analog Input 2 Engineering Units Analog Input 3 Engineering Units Ave Analog Input 1 Engineering Units Ave Analog Input 2 Engineering Units Ave Analog Input 3 Engineering Units Pace B 18 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler B 3 DECIPHERING HEXADECIMAL STATUS CODES When the Partisol Speciation Sampler s PRC 5 Status Codes are downloaded they are displayed as hexadecimal numbers This section describes hexadecimal numbers shows you how to do simple addition and subtraction with these numbers and explains how they relate to the sampler s status codes Generally in our everyday lives we use the decimal number system which is a base 10 number system It uses 10 symbols 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 to represent num
37. 5 87 5 AI1 0 00 AI2 0 00 AI3 0 00 Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA PAGE 9 6 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler AmbT WVel Pres WDir RH All AI2 ALB SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA Revision A 000 value has meaning only if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the Partisol Speciation Sampler This field contains the minimum average and maxi mum ambient temperature C recorded during the sampling period This field contains the vector based average of the wind velocity km h recorded during the filter exposure period This value has meaning only if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the Partisol Speciation Sampler This field contains the minimum average and maxi mum ambient pressure mm Hg recorded during the sampling period This field contains the vector based average of the wind direction degrees recorded during the sam pling period This value has meaning only if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the Partisol Speciation Sampler This field contains the minimum average and maxi mum relative humidity recorded during the sampling period This field contains the average of analog input 1 engineering units recorded during the sampling period This field contains the average of analog input 2 engineering units recorded during the sampling period This field cont
38. Automatic analog input output calibration capability e Operates over a wide temperature range from 30 to 50 C e Low maintenance requirements through the use of durable components and long life AC vacuum pump e Designed to comply with UL CSA and CE equivalent electrical and safety approvals 1 2 ORGANIZATION OF MANUAL This manual is divided into fourteen sections six appendixes and an index which discuss different topics The first sections explain how to setup the system s hardware and software while the later sections describe the advanced features of the Partisol Speciation Sampler The user should read and implement the procedures discussed in the earlier sections before using the advanced functions explained later in the manual The following list provides an overview of the topics handled in each section of the manual Section 1 Introduction This section introduces the user to the advanced features of the Partisol Speciation Sampler and describes the flow and sampling configurations of the system It also discusses the flow control scheme used in the unit Section 2 Hardware Installation This section contains the instructions for setting up the sampling hardware and its stand Section 3 Denuder Filter and Cartridge Preparation This section explains how to prepare the Honeycomb HC denuders for use in the ChemComb cartridges and how to maintain and clean the cartridges This section also explains how to perfor
39. Coeff of Variation for Flow 2 Too High and H 8000 Coeff of Variation for Flow 4 Too High These are three more of the status codes that the unit is displaying in its original status code Now subtract B000 from 70B000 70B000 B000 700000 Continue to break down this status code to decipher the rest of the status codes displayed in this number Example 11 continued on page B 33 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 32 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Example 11 continued from page B 32 4 In the 10 000 s place of the new status code there are no status codes displayed 5 In the 100 000 s place of the new status code 700000 a status code of 700000 is displayed Because there are no status codes in the PRC 5 Status Codes table that match this number you will need to break down this number further In the 100 000 s place of the PRC 5 Status Code there are three status codes that when added together will amount to 700 000 H 100000 Vacuum Pump Failure H 200000 Vacuum Vent Valve Failure and H 400000 Audit Performed in Middle of Sample These are three more status codes that the unit is displaying in its original status code Therefore the downloaded status code 70B002 breaks down into the following status codes according to the PRC 5 Status Code table H 2 Automatic System C
40. Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 8 3 Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen Stat OK Temp Pressure Mode STOP Current Average Ambient Temp 21 3 28 6 C Ambient Pres 754 741 mmHg Ambient RH 28 3 48 3 Flow User IO Wind SysStat The Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen contains the following information Ambient Temp This field contains the current and latest averaged values of the ambient temperature C as mea sured by the external temperature sensor Ambient Pres This field contains the current and latest averaged values of the ambient pressure mm Hg Ambient RH This field contains the current and latest averaged values of the ambient relative humidity Press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen from the Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen 8 2 2 Flow Statistics SCREEN The Flow Statistics screen Figure 8 4 provides information about the flow channel setpoint rate volume and sampling time of the currently installed sampling cartridge in the Partisol Speciation Sampler Press lt F2 Stats gt from the Main screen Figure 8 1 to reach the Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen Figure 8 2 From the Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen press lt F2 Flow gt to enter the Flow Statistics screen SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION Pace 8 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler
41. Menu Screen Status Codes Status Codes Stats Screen System Status Temp Pres Flow Stats User I O Stats Wind Stats System Stats Stats Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen System Setup System System Setup Site ID Screen Fired Information Screen Setup Screen Screen Input Outpu options RS232 Setup RS485 Setup Analog Input Analog Output Cone Closure Setup Screen Screen Setup Screen Setup Screen Stean Specific Sampling Setup Screen Sampling Setup Sample Options Screen Group Setup Cartridge List Screen Setup Screen Sample Setup Screen Data Storage Filter Data Input Data Interval Data Screen Screen Screen Service Mode Exit to Service Mode Figure A 40 Hierarchy of screens available through the Master menu Access the Master menu by pressing lt MENU gt when in a non service operating mode APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 17 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 41 Master Menu screen with status codes options Master Menu gt Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage Service Mode StCode Figure A 42 Master Menu screen with system status options Master Menu Status Codes gt System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage Service Mode Figure A 43 Master Menu screen with system setup
42. Pace 3 14 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 21 Placing clean red caps on a Honeycomb denuder Figure 3 22 Honeycomb denuder with red caps on either end 3 3 2 DENUDER COATING PROCEDURE To minimize contamination of the denuders coat and dry them inside the clean air hood Have a supply of clean dry red size EC 32 polyethylene caps ready before coating the denuders Figure 3 22 To balance the pressure of the denuder half of the caps must have a hole in them Use a needle to make the hole in the caps and mark them by cutting a small piece of the caps edge Figure 3 23 SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 15 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 23 Mark the red caps that have holes in them by cutting a small piece of the caps edge Be sure to minimize the exposure of denuders to room air during coating because the acid gases and ammonia in the laboratory air can cause contamination To decrease drying time and to protect the denuders from contamination pass clean dry air through the freshly coated denuders until they are dry Figures 3 24 and 3 25 The clean air system is shown in Figures 3 2 and 3 4 Figure 3 24 Placing a denuder on the manifold of a clean air system SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 16 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Par
43. Para 0 SetPRC RS485 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode SetPRC RS485 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp Stat OK RS232 Setup Mode STOP RS232 protocol needs to be set to RealTime for the PRC settings to work Press any key to continue Set PRC RS485 A I A O Contact APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 14 RS232 RealTime Data screen Figure A 15 RS485 Setup screen Revision A 000 RS232 RealTime Data Intv 8 Data 1 None Data 7 None Data 2 None Data 8 None Data 3 None Data 9 None Data 4 None Data 10 None Data 5 None Data 11 None Data 6 None Data 12 None Function Keys in Browse Mode Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp Stat OK RS485 Setup Mode STOP Station 11 RS232 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 6 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 16 Analog Input Setup screen Revision A 000 Stat OK Const A L 0 0000 2 0 0000 3 0 0000 A I Setup Const B 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Mode STOP Const C 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 Calculated Values A I Mode 0 00 2 0 00 3 XXXX 0 0 RS232 RS485 A O Con
44. Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 2 3 SAMPLE OPTIONS SCREEN The Sample Options screen Figure 7 5 allows the user to choose the flow errormode and continuous sampling and system check options Ifno choices are identified in this screen the unit will default to a flow error mode of ERR and the continuous sampling and system check will default to OFF While in the Main screen Figure 7 1 press lt F4 Sample gt to enter the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 In the Sample Setup screen press lt F1 Options gt to display the Sample Options screen The Sample Options screen displays the following information Flow Error Mode There are three options to choose from when setting the flow error mode ERR WAIT and NEXT If a flow error occurs when the flow error mode is set to ERR the unit will stop sampling and enter the Error Mode The user must then press lt RUN STOP gt twice once to enter the Stop Operating Mode and then once more to initiate sampling before the unit may continue sampling Ifa flow error occurs Figure 7 5 Sample Options screen Stat OK Flow Error Mode NEXT Continuous Sampling OFF System Check ON Sample Options Mode STOP Function Keys in Browse Mode Function Keys in Edit Mode List List SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION when the flow error mode is set to WAIT
45. Status Code table in Section B 2 and break down the status code into its different place holders 1 In the one s place of the original status code a status code of 2 is displayed In the one s place of the PRC 5 Status Code table the 2 status code matches the H 2 Automatic System Calibration Failed status code This is one of the status codes that the unit is displaying in its original status code Now subtract 2 from 70B002 70B002 2 70B000 Continue to break down this status code to decipher the rest of the status codes displayed in this number 2 In the ten s place of the new status code there are no status codes displayed 3 In the 100 s place of the new status code there are no status codes displayed 4 In the 1 000 s place of the new status code 70B000 a status code of B000 is displayed Because there are no status codes in the PRC 5 Status Code table that match this number you will need to break down this number further First convert B000 to a decimal number From the table in Figure B 1 you see that B is 11 which converts B000 to 11 000 Next look at the PRC 5 Status Code table to decipher the 11 000 status code In the 1 000 s place of the table there are three status codes that when added together will amount to 11 000 H 1000 Coeff of Variation for Flow 1 Too High H 2000
46. System Set p SCS a cainasvuvsacivuanausiacdteancavanuaerelatoacuannawsen 7 5 1 2 2 Sample Setup Screen ssssssrrrrererrrrrrreernnnrnnnseeeereeeenessceeo 7 7 7 2 3 Sample Options Screen 0cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 7 9 7 2 4 Group Setup SCIeen ccccccceeceeeeeee cess tees aiei eiii 7 11 7 2 6 Site Identification Screen cc cccceseececeeeeeeseeeeeseeneees 7 15 7 2 7 System Information Screen ceccee eee e cess eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 15 7 3 Sampling Programs 2 c ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseaaeesaeeaaeeaeeees 7 16 7 3 1 Basic Sampling Setup Screen ccc eeeeeeeseeecteeeeeeeeeees 7 17 7 3 2 Time Sampling Setup Screen ccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 19 Pace X Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Table of Contents continued 7 3 3 Time 2 Sampling Setup Screen ccccececeeteeeeeeeeeees 7 20 7 3 4 Advanced Sampling Setup Screen ccccceeeeeeeeees 7 21 7 3 5 Episodic Sampling Setup Screen ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 25 7 3 6 RS232 Program Mode ssssssssssssssrrnnenerrnnnunnssteseeneesescors 7 27 7 3 7 Filter Times Screen ccccccccccccecccecceeccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeess 7 27 7 3 8 Cartridge List Setup Screen vecisissssreccncscecrssenincnemneninndys 7 28 7 4 Turning Off the Partisol Speciation Sampler 05 7 30 7 5 Automatic Switching of Edit Modes an
47. The software supplied with the instrumentation documentation and any information contained therein may not be used duplicated or disclosed to anyone in whole or in part other than as authorized in a fully executed R amp P End User License Agreement or with the express written permission of R amp P Partisol and the rp logo are registered trademarks of Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc Other trademarks are the property of their respective holders Pace Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Safety Notice Repair of instrumentation manufactured by Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc R amp P should only be attempted by properly trained service personnel and should only be conducted in accordance with R amp P system documentation Do not tamper with this hardware High voltages may be present in all instrument enclosures Use established safety precautions when working with this instrument Instrument is supplied with a grounded three prong plug designed for outdoor use When operating the instrument outdoors be sure that it is plugged into a properly rated exterior outdoor outlet The Partisol stand must be anchored when installed outdoors to prevent tipping of the sampler and or stand in high winds The seller cannot foresee all possible modes of operation in which the user may attempt to utilize this instrumentation The user assumes all liability associated with the use of this instrum
48. a constant volumetric flow rate Standard Pres The Standard Pressure mm Hg is used by the sampler to report the flow rate results in standard terms The default setting of Standard Pressure is 999 The default setting for SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 5 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Revision A 000 ee eee Stat OK System Setup Mode STOP Average Temp 99 Standard Temp 99 Average Pres 999 Standard Pres 999 Date Form yy mm dd Average Time 30 Time Form Auto Run NO Curr Time 09 16 28 Curr Date 99 11 04 I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Browse Mode I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Standard Pressure does not have any effect on the volumetric flow rate and actual volume calculations by the unit Date Form The Date Form determines the form in which the sampler Average Time Time Form Auto Run Curr Time SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION displays dates The default value is yy mm dd The Partisol Speciation Sampler makes the following choices available yy mm dd default mm dd yy dd mm yy The Average Time parameter defines the sample averaging and storage interval min for the input data records Section 9 The default value of this parameter is 30 minutes meaning that input data values are averaged over 30 minute periods and stored every 30 minutes
49. all three Condition parameters is i With the values entered in the Advanced Sampling Setup screen as shown in Figure 7 17 sampling on Group 01 will begin any time after 11 24 on November 4 1999 when the ambient temperature is between 20 and 25 C and the wind speed is between 5 and 40 km h The sampler will continue to flow ambient air through the sampling cartridge s as long as both conditions are met The sampler will stop the flow through the cartridge s at any time that either condition is not met The sampler will cycle the ambient air flow through the cartridge s on and off for the duration of the sampling run depending upon the ambient conditions The unit will switch to the next group of cartridges at the programmed Stop Sample time 11 28 regardless of the sampling conditions at that moment The unit also will switch to the next group of cartridges regardless of the sampling conditions that occurred during the last programmed sampling duration SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 23 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 18 Setting the wind direction parameter WNDDIR in the Advanced Sampling Setup screen to sample only when the wind direction ranges from 315 to 45 When setting the WNDDIR range think of the range as a section of a compass Figure 7 18 This section can be expressed in terms of two values a minimum and a maximum The minimum value is defi
50. are no longer met Sampling will begin on the new sampling cartridge s only when conditions are again met With Episodic sampling there is no set sampling cycle for SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 25 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 20 Episodic Sampling Setup screen a given group of cartridges rather the sampler itself is given a duration during which the sampling on an undetermined number of cartridges will take place The Episodic Sampling Setup screen contains the following parameters Current Time Start Event Capture Stop Event Capture Cond Min Max The current time and date are displayed in this field The Start Event Capture parameter is the start time for the sampler to determine if conditions met The air flow through the sampling cartridge s will start as soon as the conditions are met The unit will stop sampling and enter the Done Mode when the current time equals the Stop Event Capture time The unit allows you to use the values of up to three input variables to control conditional sampling These three terms Condition Minimum and Maximum are joined together as and functions to form the circumstances under which sampling takes place A value of for the Condition parameter indicates that a particular term is not used The permissible values of the Condition parameter are identical to the conditions found in the Adv
51. calibration screens Sensor Calibration and Flow Calibra tion screens Record all required operating parameters IMPORTANT After the new system software has been downloaded you must do a total reset of the unit This resets all of the unit s parameters to their default conditions and clears the system s data storage buffers including the calibration constants Be sure to record your operating parameters and calibration constants before uploading the new software and resetting your unit 2 Return the sampler to the Stop Operating Mode Section 5 1 NOTE This action can be performed remotely if the instrument is in the AK Protocol Appendix C by executing the appropriate SFxx command s 3 Using the 9 to 9 pin cable 07 000587 supplied with the sampler connect the unit s RS232 port to your PC s RS232 port 4 Set the sampler s current RS232 Protocol to None in the RS232 Setup screen Section 10 In the same screen confirm that the RS232 communication is set up for 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity The downloading software supports a baud rate of 9600 APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SYSTEM SOFTWARE Pace D 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 5 Load the following software provided with the system onto a PC preferably all in the same directory to perform the software download RPLOAD EXE Executable program for local or remote downloading RPLOAD CFG Configuration fi
52. channels depending on your unit s configuration that are first directed through ChemComb cartridges The air streams pass through either a PTFE or quartz 47 mm filter or a Sodium Carbonate denuder and a nylon 47 mm filter that are housed in the ChemComb cartridges Figure 1 2 The air flows then continue through a bank valve to a series of water traps which prevent water from entering the mass flow controllers Figure 1 3 The air streams then collect in the accumulator pass through a check valve and then exit the system through the pump Pace 1 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Bank valve Reservoir Leak Y check valve GA Pressure Mass flow transducer controllers Accumulator Vacuum vent valve Figure 1 3 Flow configura tion for the Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Pace 1 10 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Section 2 Hardware Installation This section describes the installation of the Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler along with the setup of its support stand This section also covers a number of operational considerations 2 1 STANDARD HARDWARE CONFIGURATION The following is a list of the standard components compilation package provided with a Partisol Speciation S
53. continue to sample until all sampling condi tions are met except when a critical error condition is encountered Section 8 SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Error Mode The sampler proceeds to the Error Mode ERR when the measured flow deviates from its set point by 10 for 5 minutes causing the unit to break off sampling and display one of the following status codes SA SB SC or SD Section 8 These status codes correspond to the flow channel where the measured flow has deviated from its set point Pressing lt RUN STOP gt with the unit in the Error Operating Mode causes the sampler to return to the Stop Operating Mode Audit Mode The Audit Operating Mode takes the unit off line and allows the user to exchange or clean components in the sampling train Leak checks and flow verifications Section 12 can also be done with the sampler in the Audit Mode When in the Wait or Sampling Modes press lt RUN STOP gt and select lt F1 Audit gt to enter the Audit Operating Mode At this point the sampler will suspend all regular operations until you complete your audit After the audit is complete press lt RUN STOP gt to resume regular operations To prepare for an audit press lt RUN STOP gt and then select lt F1 Audit gt The unit will then display its Main screen While in the Main screen press the lt MENU gt key This will bri
54. decimal multiply each place holder by 16 and then add the sum to the actual number in each place holder Example B 4 Example B 4 Convert H 5C to decimal form First multiply 5 by 16 5 16 80 Then convert H C to decimal form H C 12 Now add 80 and 12 80 12 92 Therefore H 5C 92 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 23 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler B 3 4 Convertinc Larce HexapecimaL Numsers To DECIMAL To convert hexadecimal numbers to decimal you need to understand the concept of 16 to the power of which coincides with the number of place holders in the hexadecimal number As you work your way from the beginning to the end of the hexadecimal number you must multiply each number in each place holder by the correct power of 16 except in the one s place holder Section B 3 3 1 Then you must add these sums together to find the decimal equivalent of the original hexadeci mal number Examples B 5 and B 6 B 3 4 1 UNDERSTANDING THE Powers OF 16 Each place holder in a hexadecimal number coincides with a power of 16 In the one s place the place holder furthest to the right of a hexadecimal number the power of 16 is zero This is represented as 16 and its numerical value is 1 For example in the number H 742 the number 2 is in the one s place The numerical value of the number 2 is expressed a
55. end of the denuder with a red cap that has a hole in it k SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 19 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 5 Hold the denuder by placing your thumb on the red cap that does not have a hole in it and place your middle finger on the cap that has the hole in it Figure 3 29 Place your index finger or thumb on the hole of the red cap to avoid any leakage through the hole when turning the denuder Figure 3 29 Be sure to place your thumb or finger over the hole in the red cap 6 Gently invert and reverse the denuder Figures 3 29 through 3 31 10 times each way to mix the coating solution Rotate the de nuder about 120 degrees along its axis and repeat the inverting and reversing process This will ensure that all tubes in the denuder are completely coated To prevent leakage do not shake the denuder during coating SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 20 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 30 Gently invert and reverse the denuder to evenly spread the coating solution on its honeycomb interior Figure 3 31 i Coating and Coating and extracting extracting motion for the motion Honeycomb denuders Tip the denuder upside down to invert it then tip Top it back to its original Bottom position to reverse it man Cap with hole Cap without hole
56. keys 5 11 Audit Mode 7 4 12 4 audit procedures 6 4 12 1 ambient temperature 12 4 Audit Mode 12 4 flow rates 6 7 12 6 leak check 6 6 12 5 pressure 6 6 12 4 Sampling Mode 12 3 Service Mode 6 4 Stop Mode 12 1 system check 6 5 Wait Mode 12 3 autorun 7 6 7 31 average pressure 1 9 9 7 9 10 relative humidity 9 11 temperature 1 9 9 10 wind direction 9 11 wind speed 9 10 wind velocity 9 11 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index continued B Back key 5 8 BASIC Mode 7 17 batteries 12 8 baud rate 10 4 Bksp key 5 11 Browse Mode 5 8 7 31 C calculation mass concentration 3 35 calibration constants 13 3 calibration routine 6 4 12 1 cartridge filter log E 1 cartridges assembly 4 1 4 5 collars 4 10 data 9 2 disassembly 4 7 ID numbers 7 29 installation 4 12 preparation 3 1 removal 4 14 serial numbers 7 28 channels flow 1 1 7 11 7 28 check system 6 5 7 10 ChemComb cartridges 4 1 collars 4 10 shelter installation 2 1 system housing 3 5 ChSign key 5 11 clean air drying system 3 1 codes hexadecimal B 19 B 30 codes status 8 1 B 13 collars installation 4 10 compilation package 2 1 connector hose 4 1 continuous sampling 7 10 critical status condition 8 2 D data bits 10 4 cartridge 9 2 downloading 6 2 10 2 10 6 10 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index continued filter 1 3 9 1
57. must return the sampler to the Stop Operating Mode by pressing lt RUN STOP gt before attempting to enter the Edit Mode in the desired screen The System Setup screen contains a number of fields that can be changed Figure 5 9 Press lt F3 System gt when in the Main screen to enter the System Setup screen Because the System Setup screen contains fields that can be changed or edited Figure 5 8 displays a second set of soft function key definitions that are active only when the unit is in the Edit Mode Stat OK System Setup Mode STOP Average Temp 99 Standard Temp 99 Average Pres 999 Standard Pres 999 Date Form yy mm dd Average Time 30 Time Form Auto Run NO Curr Time 09 16 28 Curr Date 99 11 04 I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Browse Mode I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 10 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Y The cursor changes shape when the sampler enters the Edit Mode Y Use the arrow keys to move from one field to another while remaining in the Edit Mode Y Leave the Edit Mode by pressing lt ENTER gt to save changes or lt ESC gt to disregard changes After pressing lt EDIT gt to enter the Edit Mode the cursor changes shape it changes from an underline when it is in the Browse Mode to a arge square shape when the
58. option to either repair or replace any component that fails during the warranty period due to a defect in workmanship and or material provided purchaser has promptly reported same to R amp P and R amp P has upon inspection found such components to be defective The above warranty is contingent upon the proper use of the equipment 1 e operation and maintenance in accordance with the procedures set forth in the provided operation manual s and does not cover equipment that has been modified without R amp P s approval or which has been subjected to abuse or unusual physical or electrical stress This warranty does not cover any optional personal computer equipment or operating system software supplied with the equipment beyond the warranty period provided by the manufacturer of the computer or software The customer is responsible for obtaining a local third party service agreement for computer service requirements beyond the warranty term of the computer THE ABOVE IS A LIMITED WARRANTY AND IS THE ONLY WARRANTY MADE BY R amp P R amp P DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE STATED EXPRESS WAR RANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL LIABILITIES OR OBLIGATIONS OF R amp P FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE DELIVERY USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL R amp P BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY OR INDI REC
59. rene A Flow Stats Mode STOP Flow Setpoint Current Volume Time A 0 0 1 m 0 2 1 m 0 0 1 0 B 0 0 1 m 0 1 1 m 0 0 1 0 C 0 0 1 m 0 4 1 m 0 0 1 0 D 0 0 1 m 0 1 l m 0 0 1 0 TmpPres User IO Wind SysStat The Flow Statistics screen contains the following information Flow Setpoint Current Volume Time This field contains the flow channel This field contains the flow rate set point volumet ric l min This field contains the current flow rate volumetric l min This field contains the sample volume volumetric m drawn through the cartridge This field contains the elapsed sample time inhh mm of the cartridge Press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen from the Flow Statistics screen 8 2 3 User I O Statistics SCREEN The User I O Statistics screen Figure 8 5 displays the analog inputs and the digital outputs of the Partisol Speciation Sampler The averages correspond to the values computed over the latest completed averaging storage interval as defined by the Average Time parameter in the System Setup screen Section 7 2 1 Press lt F3 User IO gt from any of the statistics screens to enter the User I O Statistics screen SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION Pace 8 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler ie appeals Stat OK User I O Mode STOP Current Average Analog Input 1 0 00 0 00 Analog Input 2 0 00 0 00 Analog Input 3 0
60. sampler is in the Stop Operating Mode The following fields make up the Sample Setup screen Sample Definition Type This parameter allows the user to select the type of sampling program BASIC TIME TIME2 ADV Advanced EPISOD Episodic and RS232 Basic 24 hour continuous sampling BASIC is the unit s default setting Press lt List gt or lt List gt in the Edit Mode to access the sampling program selections Sampling programs are described in Sections 7 3 1 7 3 6 Default Sample Start Time The Default Sample Start Time is used to set the default starting time for the selected sampling pro gram in hh mm 00 00 is the system default for this parameter When editing this parameter treat each part of the time as a separate field Default Sample Duration This parameter allows the user to select the sam pling duration for the selected sampling program in hhh mm The default for this parameter is 024 00 When editing this parameter treat each part of the time as a separate field SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 7 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 4 Sample Setup screen Stat OK Sample Setup Mode STOP 09 38 11 1999 11 04 Sample Definition Type BASIC Default Sample Start Time 11 24 Default Sample Duration 000 04 Default Sample Repeat Time 000 04 Default Filter Type P Options Group ChanLst SampSet Function Keys in Brows
61. the Filter Data Statistics screen Figure 9 2 From the Filter Data Statistics screen press lt F4 IntvDat gt to enter the Interval Data screen The Interval Data screen contains the following information Rec This field contains the number of the current inter val record whichis displayed in the upperright hand corner of the screen SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 9 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 9 7 Interval Data screen Time Interval Data Rec 102 10 40 1999 11 04 Ambient Temp 22 5 C Ambient Pres 756 mmHg Flow A 0 0 1 min Flow B 0 0 1 min Flow C 0 0 l min Flow D 0 0 1 min Rec Rec InptDat DwnLoad Time Ambient Temp Ambient Pres Flow A D 9 3 Input DATA SCREEN This field contains the ending time date hh mm yyyy mm dd by default of the 5 minute interval being displayed The Ambient Temp field displays the 5 minute average of the ambient temperature C The Ambient Pres field displays the 5 minute aver age of the ambient pressure mmHg The Flow A D field displays the 5 minute averages of the various flow rates l min The Partisol Speciation Sampler stores averaged meteorological and input data at the interval specified by the user in the Average Time field of the System Setup screen Section 7 2 1 The default averaging storage interval is 30 minutes The sampler has the capacity to retain 32 d
62. the bath The impactor plates must not touch each other because sonica tion causes the Teflon coating to be deposited on the porous stainless steel plate SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION PAGE 3 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 11 Impactor plate that fits inside the inlet of a ChemComb cartridge Indented reservoir area Figure 3 12 Rack for cleaning impactor plates Impactor plate rack Impactor plate in rack 2 Sonicate impactor plates for 15 minutes 3 Rinse the impactor plates thoroughly with distilled water and then sonicate again for 5 minutes with distilled water only 4 Repeat the rinse and sonicate procedure with distilled water only until all the detergent has been removed 5 Cover the impactor plates with Kimwipes and allow the impactor plates to dry in room air If you must dry the impactor plates rapidly rinse them with methanol 6 Store the clean impactor plates in a clean ziplocked bag SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 3 2 6 2 CLEANING PREviousLy USED IMPACTOR PLATES Previously used impactor plates will require more thorough cleaning than new impactor plates Follow these steps to clean used impactor plates 1 Wipe the collected material and grease from the impactor plates with a clean Kimwipe You also ca
63. the power cord The unit is properly grounded and use of a ground fault interrupter is not necessary In the case of 230 VAC configurations of the Partisol Speciation Sampler no electrical plug is provided at the end of the power cord This line must be wired in accordance with safety codes 6 Install the ambient temperature sensor Section 2 2 5 7 Install the ChemComb cartridges in the manner described in Section 4 2 2 1 INSTALLING THE RELATIVE Humipity SENSOR Follow these steps to install the relative humidity sensor 1 Plug the relative humidity sensor into the 9 pin connector located on the right side of the enclosure Figures 2 1 and 2 2 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 2 Tighten both screws located on the bottom right and left side of the sensor securing the sensor to the side of the enclosure Figures 2 3 and 2 4 Figure 2 3 Securing the screws on the bottom right and left corners of the relative humidity sensor Figure 2 4 Relative humidity sensor installed on right side panel of the unit SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 5 Partisol Speciation Sampler with a large rainhood installed on the right side panel of the unit 2 2 2 INSTALLING THE LARGE RAINHOOD Follow these steps to install the large rainhood 1 Pe
64. times for each cartridge in the cartridge list press the lt gt arrow SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 27 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 21 Filter Times screen Group Start Stop 1 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 11 44 99 11 04 11 44 99 11 04 11 48 99 11 04 11 48 99 11 04 11 52 99 11 04 NHN UU FW ND The Filter Times screen contains the following parameters Group This column displays the group number for each cartridge in the cartridge list The unit will display the maximum number of groups in this column based on the number of groups per channel Start This column displays the beginning sampling times and dates for each cartridge in the cartridge list Stop This column displays the ending sampling times and dates for each cartridge in the cartridge list 7 3 8 CARTRIDGE List SETUP SCREEN The Cartridge List Setup screen is accessible from the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 by pressing lt F3 ChanLst gt The Cartridge List Setup screen Figure 7 22 allows the user to enter the type of filters in each cartridge the serial numbers of the cartridges and the flow rates for each cartridge Any flow channel can be disabled shut off by setting its flow to 0 If the flows for all channels in a group are shut off t
65. to the user Section 9 Viewing Stored Data Interval and filter data stored internally may be viewed on the sampler s screen This section describes the type of operational information stored internally and how to view the data Section 10 Data Input and Output Data may be downloaded through the Partisol Speciation Sampler s RS232 bidirec tional port This section describes how to transmit internally stored operational information to external devices The unit also can receive and transmit analog voltage information and output user defined digital information as logic level outputs This section describes these input output capabilities Section J1 Password Protection This section describes the instrument s password protection functions Section 12 Verification Procedures and Routine Maintenance This section explains how to verify the sampler s performance and describes hardware maintenance procedures Pace 1 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Section 13 Resetting the Sampler This section describes how to reset the instrument s parameter set points and internal data storage Section 14 Service Menu This Partisol Speciation Sampler contains software support for low level diagnostics and troubleshooting This section describes the screens that the user may access for these types of activities Many of the routines exercised from the service menu ar
66. treat each part of the time and date as a separate field The Stop Sample parameter defines the time and date that the unit will stop sampling for the group number displayed in the Group field at the top of the screen When editing treat each part of the time and date as a separate field Pace 7 22 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Cond Min Max The Partisol Speciation Sampler allows you to use the values of up to three input variables to control conditional sam pling These three terms Condition Minimum and Maxi mum are joined together as and functions to form the circumstances under which sampling takes place A value of for the Condition parameter indicates that a particu lar term is not used The permissible values of the Condition parameter are as follows ees Condition not used TEMP Current ambient temperature C PRES Current ambient pressure mm Hg RH Current relative humidity FLOW Sample flow rate l min WNDSPD Current wind speed km h WNDDIR Current wind direction deg All A I 1 engineering units Al2 A I 2 engineering units AI A I 3 engineering units AILAVE Average A I 1 engineering units ARAVE Average A I 2 engineering units ABAVE Average A I 3 engineering units The Minimum and Maximum parameters define the range for each condition during which sampling should take place No conditional sampling takes place if the value of
67. will switch to the next group of cartridges scheduled for sampling It then either begins sampling or enters the Wait Operating Mode to await the start of the next sequential sample If the unit begins sampling the Z status condition will be retained in the current record of filter data However if the unit enters the Wait Operating Mode the unit will automatically clear the Z status condition SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 32 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Y The sampler displays the current status code in the upper left hand corner of the Main screen and several other screens Figure 8 1 Main screen Y The current status code is made up of one or more single or double letter abbreviations or OK Section 8 Operating Information This section describes the status codes generated by the Partisol Speciation Sampler and the operating information contained in the Operating Statistics screens Refer to Appendix A for a detailed hierarchy of screens 8 1 Status CopEs The sampler displays operational status codes in the upper left hand corner of the Main screen Figure 8 1 and on several other screens The unit shows a status of OK ifno current status conditions exist The sampler resets the status code to OK when it switches to the next sampling group Stat OK Partisol 2300 Mode STOP 09 02 36 1999 11 04 Group Start BASIC Stop
68. wired to a main electrical source of the proper voltage in accordance with local standards power can be applied to the unit Follow these steps to turn on the sampler 1 Install the ChemComb cartridges in the shelter Section 4 2 Press the power switch on the main panel lower left to its on 1 position to activate the sampler Figure 5 1 3 If necessary turn the adjustment knob located to the right of the keypad display to adjust the contrast of the liquid crystal display LCD Once the power switch is pressed the electronics and pump compartment heaters will turn on momentarily This is the default setting of the unit for operating in extremely cold environmental conditions where heat is necessary to warm the equipment MAIN POWER SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 1 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 5 2 TrtLE SCREEN Revision A 000 The Title screen momentarily appears on the sampler s display to identify the model number of the unit and the revision number of the installed software Figure 5 2 Figure 5 2 Title screen Version Partisol 2300 0 700 Date 12 Channel Speciation Air Sampler Nov 2 1999 Copyright 1999 Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc RDfault RData Reset 5 3 Main SCREEN After a few seconds the Title screen is automatically replaced by the Main screen Figure 5 3 The Main screen contains diff
69. x New Hi Psw Confirm Lo Confirm Hi Function Keys in Browse Mode Function Keys in Edit Mode Bksp eel System Information Software Version 0 700 Nov 2 1999 Unit Serial Number 0 Interface Board Rev 1 System Type 3 MFC A Max 20 l min MFC B Max 20 l min MFC C Max 20 l min MFC D Max 20 l min ee ern opas Sample Setup Mode STOP 09 38 11 1999 11 04 Sample Definition Type BASIC Default Sample Start Time 11 24 Default Sample Duration 000 04 Default Sample Repeat Time 000 04 Default Filter Type P Options Group ChanLst SampSet Function Keys in Browse Mode Options Group ChanLst SampSet Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 23 Sample i Options screen Stat OK Sample Options Mode STOP Flow Error Mode NEXT Continuous Sampling OFF System Check ON Function Keys in Browse Mode Function Keys in Edit Mode List List et paR JOK Group Setup Mode STOP Channels Group 2 Current Group 1 Channels 12 Chan 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A 3B 3C 3D Grp 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 Grp Grp Function Keys in Browse Mode Grp Grp Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 10 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Sp
70. 00 Appendix C Two Way Serial Communication A 000 Appendix D Installing New System Software A 000 Appendix E Cartridge Filter Log A 000 Pace VII Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Revision Descriptions To help our customers keep track of the changes to the Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler and its operating manual following is a list of the manual sections with their respective revision descriptions This list contains all the changes made to the manual since the last update Section Number Revision Description Section 12 Verification Procedures and Routine Updated pump part number Maintenance Section 12 Pace VIII Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Table of Contents SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION carers a antianeeees 1 1 Tele Advanced FO AUUI SS es 2 esncncwanseenmicrnyeabannacrimavaansseumnanvemuateatabets 1 2 1 22 Organization OF MaMa ceesatissardsnderiaesawselsausdiauisalacaddtacuclavssiulotors 1 4 1 3 Flow Schematic 0 0 eee eeeeeesecceecececcecececceceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeess 1 6 TA Systemi Configuration ssicicenciccaissncestexisainiscd nbentenbeauyumndamtensacnaans 1 9 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION sisticcssiadcssnstsstcsanliasannanidsigceidudebiavissanian 2 1 2 1 Standard Hardware Configuration ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaees 2 1 2 2 Setting Up the Sampler cc ceseeeseeeseeesenennnenseeaeeeeee
71. 1200 Next look at the PRC 5 Status Code table to decipher the 1200 status code In the 100 s place of the table there are only two status codes that when added together will amount to 1200 H 400 Flow 3 Stopped Due to 10 Dev for 5 minutes and H 800 Flow 4 Stopped Due to 10 Dev for 5 minutes These are two more of the status codes that the unit is displaying in its original status code Now subtract C00 from 20C00 20C00 C00 20 000 Continue to break down this status code to decipher the rest of the status codes displayed in this number 4 In the 10 000 s place of the PRC 5 Status Code table the status code H 20000 Pump Compartment Temp Sensor Out of Range matches the 20 000 status code This is the last status code that the unit is displaying in its original status code Therefore the downloaded status code 20C30 breaks down into the following status codes according to the PRC 5 Status Code table H 10 Flow 1 Out of Range H 20 Flow 2 Out of Range H 400 Flow 3 Stopped Due to 10 Dev for 5 minutes H 800 Flow 4 Stopped Due to 10 Dev for 5 minutes H 20000 Pump Compartment Temp Sensor Out of Range APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 31 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Example B 11 Decipher the following downloaded status code 70B002 First look at the PRC 5
72. 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 10 8 Analog Output Setup screen Stat OK A O Setup Mode STOP Variable MinVal MaxVal Format 1 None 0 00 0 00 0 5 VDC 2 None 0 00 0 00 0 5 VDC 3 None 0 00 0 00 0 5 VDC RS232 RS485 A I Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 RS485 A I Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Variable MinVal MaxVal Format SeEcTION 10 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT The Analog Output Setup screen Figure 10 8 allows the user to define the output of three voltage signals through the User I O port For each channel of output the user specifies the following parameters in the Edit Mode This field contains the program register code PRC Appen dix B of the variable whose current value is to be transmitted To enter the desired variable the user may press either the lt F1 List gt and lt F2 List gt soft function keys while in the Edit Mode or may enter the numeric PRC itself Pressing lt F3 Bksp gt allows the user to backspace over previously typed characters This field contains the value of the PRC variable that corresponds to the minimum analog voltage output 0 of full scale output This field contains the value of the variable that corresponds to the maximum analog voltage output 100 of full scale output This field contains the type of analog or current output selected
73. 2 Ensure that you mount the hose clip plate inside the hose assembly mounting plate SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 13 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 14 Using the hardware provided one 1 1 4 20 nut for each support post secure the hose clip plate onto the rear legs of the sampler Figure 2 23 Figure 2 23 Secure the hose clip plate to the hose assembly mounting plate 15 Locate the hose assembly It should contain 4 single metal pipes labeled A B C and D with attached hoses 16 Slide pipe A into the slot labeled A on the top of the unit Figure 2 24 Figure 2 24 Slide pipe A into the connector labeled A on the top of the unit SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 14 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 17 There is a nut attached to each pipe Slide the nut down the pipe and finger tighten it Then using a crescent wrench tighten the nut 1 4 turn past finger tight Figure 2 25 Figure 2 25 Tighten the nut 1 4 turn past finger tight with a crescent wrench Figure 2 26 Push the pipe into the clip on the hose clip plate SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 15 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 19 Squeeze the clip with your fingers until it snaps together Figure 2 27 Figure 2 27 Secure the pip
74. 2 42 Securing the top of the shelter box to the leg studs 8 Secure the bottom half of the shelter box to the legs with two 2 1 4 20 x 1 2 socket screws Insert the screws in the two bottom holes on each side of the shelter box Figure 2 43 Figure 2 43 Insert the screws in the bottom holes of the shelter box SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 24 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 9 Using the hardware provided one 1 1 4 20 nut for each support post secure the bottom half of the shelter box onto the legs Be sure to hold each screw with a screwdriver Figure 2 45 while turning the nuts with a nut driver Figure 2 44 Figure 2 44 Securing the bottom of the shelter box Figure 2 45 Be sure to hold the screw with a screwdriver while turning the nut SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 25 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 10 Locate the ChemComb shelter box with flow channels 2A 2D Slide it onto the studs on the shelter legs on the front of the enclosure Figure 2 46 Repeat steps 8 10 to secure the box to the shelter legs Figure 2 46 Slide the shelter box with flow channels 2A 2D onto the studs on the front side of the enclosure 11 Locate the bank valve assembly It should contain 3 single metal pipes labeled B C and D 1 metal pipe with an additional pipe clipped to it l
75. 20 Example B 1 place holders 00 10 20 01 11 21 02 12 22 03 13 23 However place holders in the hexadecimal number system increase by a value of 16 This changes the values ofthe numbers in Example B 1 In the first row of Example B 1 the place holder is 0 which makes the hexadecimal numerical value of the first number in that row 0 16 0 0 In the second row the place holder is 1 so the hexadecimal numerical value of the first number in that row is 1 16 0 16 The place holder in the third row is 2 which makes the hexadecimal numerical value of the first number in that row 2 16 0 32 B 3 2 ConverRTING DeciMAL NUMBERS TO HEXADECIMAL Converting the decimal numbers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 to hexadecimal numbers is easy because they hold the same value in the hexadecimal number system The decimal numbers 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 convert to the letters A B C D E and F Figure B 1 respectively in the hexadecimal number system B 3 2 1 CONVERTING LARGE Decimal NumBers TO HEXADECIMAL Toconvert large decimal numbers such as 74 or 2045 to hexadecimal form you must divide the decimal number by 16 repeatedly until you reach 0 while placing each remainder in a back to front sucession until you reach the beginning of the hexadeci mal number Examples B 2 and B 3 NOTE In the following examples hexadecimal numbers will be designated by an H in front of the number APP
76. 3 40 and cap the vial tightly Figure 3 41 SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 28 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 40 left Pour the extraction solution into the sample vial Figure 3 41 right Tightly cap the sample vial 12 Place the vial in a rack and store the vial at 50 C in a dark area 13 Place the red caps and the denuder on the tray and clean them as soon as possible 3 3 4 COATING AND EXTRACTION CONCERNS If you find a high blank value for ammonia there may be several reasons for it a The denuder is not clean enough Soak it in 1 N HCL longer and flush it with tap distilled water longer b When you are coating the denuder keep it away from your body by placing it deep inside the clean air hood Exhaled breath contains a lot of ammonia gas which might be absorbed by the denuder c The coating solution is not fresh or the solution was not created inside a clean air hood If you find a high blank value of sulfate ion you probably did not clean the new Honeycomb denuder well enough before sampling The denuders initially were etched during production with an etching solution which contains a high concentra tion of sulfate ion You must flush the denuders with tap distilled water for a long period of time before using them for sampling Repeat the flushing process until you get a low level of sulfate ion Sulfate ion concent
77. 300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 075 099 078 New Low Password Confirmation Code 075 Contact Closure Comparison Value 2 076 Current Low Password 077 New Low Password 079 Current High Password 100000 081 New High Password Confirmation Current Password Protection coe 083 Analog Input Offset Internal 080 New High Password 082 084 Analog Input Span Internal Service Tefen e Ps fe OS a e e o 098 Flow Span D 0 925 1 075 1 Flow Calibration Reading 0 20 Codes are described later in this Appendix 085 Analog Output Offset 087 Analog Output Offset 3 088 Analog Output Span 1 089 Analog Output Span 2 Analog Output Span 3 086 Analog Output Offset 2 Service Service APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 100 124 Code Description Default Edit Modes 100 Number of Points in Flow Calibration 101 Flow Calibration Minimum A Service 102 Flow Calibration Minimum B 103 Flow Calibration Minimum C 104 Flow Calibration Minimum D 105 Flow Calibration Maximum A 106 Flow Calibration Maximum B 107 Flow Calibration Maximum C DOUD 108 low Calibration Maximum D 109 Volumetric Flow Miniumum 3 15 15 15 15 18 4 18 4 18 4 18 4 15 18 4 110 Volumetric Flow Maximum 111
78. 300 Speciation Sampler Revision A 000 B 2 PRC Va ues DEFINED BY CopES Some of the Partisol Speciation Sampler s program register codes PRC have values that are defined by codes These codes are defined in this section PRC 3 Operating Mode 0 NYDN BWN Ke PRC 4 Status Type 0 1 2 PRC 5 Status Code 0 H 1 H 2 H 4 H 8 H 10 H 20 H 40 H 80 H 100 H 200 H 400 H 800 H 1000 H 2000 H 4000 H 8000 H 10000 H 20000 Critical warning see PRC 4 above STOP WAIT SAMP 3CHCK DONE ERR SVC PAUS OK WARN CRIT Stop Wait Sample System Check Done Error Service Pause OK Status Warning Critical Warning see PRC 5 below OK No Status Conditions M Flash Memory C Automatic System Calibration Failed Y Z System Reset Occurred Power Failure Fl Flow 1 Out of Range F2 Flow 2 Out of Range F3 Flow 3 Out of Range F4 Flow 4 Out of Range S1 Flow 1 Stopped Due to 10 Dev for 5 minutes S2 Flow 2 Stopped Due to 10 Dev for 5 minutes S3 Flow 3 Stopped Due to 10 Dev for 5 minutes S4 Flow 4 Stopped Due to 10 Dev for 5 minutes Ol Coeff of Variation for Flow 1 Too High 02 Coeff of Variation for Flow 2 Too High 03 Coeff of Variation for Flow 3 Too High 04 Coeff of Variation for Flow 4 Too High TA Ambient Sensor Out of Range TP Pump Compartment Temp Sensor Out of Range NOTE The current status code is the sum of all conditions that currently apply APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGIS
79. 6 1999 11 04 Group Start BASIC Stop 1 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 3 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 4 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 StCode Stats System Sample Data L SECTION 11 PAssworD PROTECTION Pace 11 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 11 4 Main screen with high password protection turned on High When in the high protection state the sampler prevents the user from editing values and changing screens Execute the following keystrokes while in the Browse Mode to initiate or disable the high protection state lt ENTER gt lt ENTER gt lt ENTER gt HiPassword lt ENTER gt If the password protection is successfully invoked or revoked the unit will beep three times An H in the farthest field to the right of the soft function key line Figure 1 1 4 indicates that the unit is in the high protection state Stat OK Partisol 2300 Mode STOP 09 02 36 1999 11 04 Group Start BASIC Stop 1 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 3 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 4 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 StCode Stats System Sample Data H The initial passwords for both low and high protection is 100000 The user may move from low to high protection using the keystrokes above for the high protection state When the user turns offhigh protection the unit alwa
80. 6399 ej eee 1 N Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 150 174 Code Description 150 Default Duration 151 Default Repeat Time 152 Default Filter Type 153 Sample Type z gt 154 Sample Group Edit 155 Site IDI zZ gt 156 Site ID2 157 Instrument Type 158 Volume A 159 Volume B 160 Volume C 161 Volume D 162 Valid Time A 163 Total Time A 164 Valid Time B 165 Total Time B 166 Valid Time C 167 Total Time C 8 Valid Time D Fg ee a o e APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 175 199 Code Description Units 175 Real Time Clock Adjustment sec day 176 Auto Run N A 177 Cartridge Type 1A N A 178 Cartridge Type 1B N A 179 Cartridge Type 1C N A 180 Cartridge Type 1D N A 181 Cartridge Type 2A N A 182 Cartridge Type 2B N A 183 Cartridge Type 2C N A 184 Cartridge Type 2C N A 185 Cartridge Type 3A N A 186 Cartridge Type 3B N A 187 Cartridge Type 3C N A 188 Cartridge Type 3D N A 189 Cartridge ID 1A N A 0 9999999 190 Cartridge ID 1B N A 0 9999999 191 Cartridge ID 1C N A 0 9999999 192 Cartridge ID 1D N A 0 9999999 1 Cartridge ID 2A N A 0 9999999 93 i APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 10 0 9999999 0 99999
81. 7 Immediately cap this end with a clean dry red cap that does not have a hole in it Avoid excessive pressure while applying the cap to the end of the denuder Hold the denuder by placing your thumb on the red cap that does not have a hole in it and place your middle finger on the cap that has the hole in it Figure 3 29 Place your index finger on the hole of the red cap to avoid any leakage through the hole when turning the denuder Gently invert and reverse the denuder Figures 3 29 through 3 31 10 times each way Then rotate the denuder about 120 degrees along its axis and repeat the inverting and reversing process 10 times Rotate the denuder again 120 degrees along its axis and invert and reverse another 10 times This will ensure that all tubes in the denuder have been rinsed with the extraction solu tion Hold the denuder so that the red cap with the hole is on top Shake the denuder to force the liquid to the bottom letting the extraction solution remain in the bottom red cap that does not have a hole in it 10 Remove the red cap with hole from the top of the denuder Hold the bottom red end cap firmly and carefully remove the denuder from the cap Most of the extraction solution should remain in the bottom red cap If the extraction solution does not come out gently shake the denuder again to get the solution out of the denuder and into the bottom red cap 11 Pour the extraction solution into the sample vial Figure
82. 8 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from instrument In this case lt CR gt and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument Eo a ae I O sse ASCII code 002 1 lt spe lt sne ASCII code 002 EEEE 1 digit Station Number RS Para 1 HEJSES 1 digit Station Number RS Para 1 serge et SEIE AESF 4 digit Set Storage Marker command a ao lt space gt Space 7 lt space gt lt space gt Space RS Para 3 13010 2 digit Channel Number as defined Number of current status conditions by RS Para 2 EEES 2 ee rane assis the response transmission according Marker buffer E move to end of storage a ooo buffer Enter positive numbers such as 250 to move forward by n i records and negative numbers such as 1000 to move At els Ee o a os ooo s S e i i e o e S S APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler AK Protocol Response if Command Addressed to Instrument is Unrecognizable COM 2 WAY SETTINGS ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in
83. 8 Leak Check Stat OK Flow Audit Mode SVC Prompt screen Remove cartridge from Channel 1A and seal the inlet Press any key to continue SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Pace 12 5 Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 12 9 Leak plug 7 installed in flow channel 3 After you have installed a leak plug on the proper flow channel press any key on the keypad to begin the leak check The unit will automatically perform a leak check If a Pass message is dis played at the end of the leak check cycle press lt F2 Chan gt to switch the unit to the next flow channel If a Fail message is displayed refer to the Service Manual 4 Re install a cartridge on the flow channel that passed the leak check Press lt F4 LeakChk gt to begin the leak check procedure on the next flow channel and follow the instructions on the unit s screen Repeat the leak check procedure for all of the flow chan nels 12 1 6 VERIFYING THE FLow RATES Perform the temperature verification Section 12 1 3 pressure verification Section 12 1 4 and leak check Section 12 1 5 before executing the flow verification procedure Follow these steps to verify the flow rate 1 Ensure that the unit is set on the flow channel that you want to verify While in the Audit screen Figure 12 4 press lt F5 Start gt and follow the instructions displ
84. 99 0 9999999 0 9999999 0 9999999 97 198 199 _ Leas 0 1 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 Ea Ee ae Ls EA EZA EA EA EZA ee a Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 200 224 N A 0 9999999 Code Description 200 Cartridge ID 3D 201 low Channel 1A 202 low Channel 1B 203 low Channel 1C 204 low Channel 1D N n low Channel 2A low Channel 2B low Channel 2C low Channel 2D low Channel 3A low Channel 3B N my low Channel 3C N N low Channel 3D 213 Channels Per Group 214 Sampling Start sec 0 2 14E9 sec 0 2 14E9 sec 0 2 14E9 215 Sampling Mid Stop 216 Sampling Restart 217 Sampling Stop 2 Sampling Condition 1 Code a Pg ee foe o o e ojee fee o o os s a emcee o e 224 Conditional Sampling Maximum 1 wa amomo O o f nom Codes are described later in this Appendix APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 225 249 1E10 1E10 NotRun 1E10 1E10 NotRun 1 12 NotRun 1 12 N NotRun Anytime Anytime NotRun 5 i 1 1 N Codes are described later in this Appendix APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 12 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2
85. Available programs are Basic Time Time2 Advanced Episodic and RS232 All of these sampling programs except the RS232 sampling program displays a sampling setup screen accessed from the Sample Setup screen which includes the default parameters set in the Sample Setup screen The RS232 sampling program does not have a sampling setup screen If RS232 is selected as the sampling method a Warning Confirmation screen Figure 7 13 will display when lt F4 SampSet gt is pressed from the Sample Setup screen indicating that no time or conditional setup parameters are required for RS232 sampling Section 10 2 describes setting up the sampler for remote RS232 operation SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 16 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 13 Warning Confirmation screen Stat OK Sample Setup Mode STOP No Time or Conditional setup is required for RS232 sampling Press any key to continue Options Group ChanLst SampSet Press lt F4 Sample gt when in the Main screen Figure 7 1 to enter the Sample Setup screen Only one of the specific sampling setup screens described in Sections 7 3 1 7 3 5 will display depending on the Sample Definition Method selected by the user in the Sample Setup screen Section 7 2 2 For example if BASIC was selected in the Sample Definition field then the Basic Samping Setup screen Figure 7 14 w
86. CTION 1 INTRODUCTION Pace 1 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION where Flow Rate Control set point of the mass flow meter equivalent flow at 0 C and 1 Atmosphere Flow Rate Volumetric flow rate set point l min as entered by the user in the Cartridge List Setup screen Section 7 3 8 This value is 16 7 l min 1 m h for most applications Ave Temp The current temperature C as measured by the temperature sensor mounted on the down tube of the sampler Ave Pres The current pressure mm Hg as measured by the pressure transducer in the sampler s enclosure The Partisol Speciation Sampler automatically determines the sampled volume in volumetric or standard m for each filter exposed and stores this information internally for later viewing or downloading To report volumes in standard terms the user must ensure that the standard tempera ture and standard pressure parameters in the System Setup screen Section 7 2 1 are set to their proper values In many countries standard volumes are defined in terms of 760 mm Hg pressure and 25 C temperature Flow volumes referenced internally by the sampler to 0 C are converted to standard conditions using the following computation Std Temp 273 15 760 mm Hg Volume Volume x X 213 15 760 mm Hg 1 4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler has 4 or 12 air flow
87. Current Group This parameter displays the current group selected You can change the current group by pressing the soft keys lt F1 Grp gt and lt F2 Grp gt Channels This parameter defines the number of flow channels used for sampling You may set this field to any multiple of Chan nels Groups that is less than the unit maximum of 4 or 12 depending on your system configuration If you have a sampler that has 12 flow channels and want to sample with more than 4 flow channels make sure that this field is set to 12 See Figures 7 7 through 7 10 for detailed cartridge flow channel and group setup information Chan This list displays the actual cartridge groups and identifies which group is presently selected These identifiers will change when you edit the Channels Groups and Chan nels fields Grp This list displays the actual group configuration that matches each cartridge installed on the sampler These identifiers will change when you edit the Channels Groups and Channels fields When the unit is sampling this screen will show the parameters for the current group of cartridges that are sampling Also during sampling you can not edit this screen Figures 7 7 and 7 9 describe how the group numbers and flow channels combine when using different numbers of groups with a 12 channel and 4 channel unit Figures 7 8 and 7 10 display these configurations in a visual form For example in
88. EGISTER CODES Pace B 30 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Example B 10 Decipher the following downloaded status code 20C30 First look at the PRC 5 Status Code table in Section B 2 and break down the status code into its different place holders 2499 1 There are no status codes displayed in the one s place of the original status code 2 In the ten s place of the original status code a status code of 30 is displayed Because there are no status codes in the table that match this number you will need to break down this number further In the ten s place of the table there are only two status codes that when added together will amount to 30 H 10 Flow 1 Out of Range and H 20 Flow 2 Out of Range These are two of the status codes that the unit is displaying in its original status code At this point you must subtract 30 from the original status code 20C30 30 20C00 Now continue to break down the resulting status code to decipher the rest of the status codes displayed in this number 3 In the 100 s place of the new status code 20C00 a status code of C00 is displayed Because there are no status codes in the table that match this number you will need to break down this number further First convert C00 to a decimal number From the table in Figure B 1 you see that C is 12 which converts C00 to
89. ENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 20 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Example B 2 Convert 74 to hexadecimal form 74 H __ First divide 16 into 74 74 16 4 with a remainder of 10 Convert the 10 to hexadecimal form Figure B 1 10 H A and place it at the end of the hexadecimal number 74 H A Now continue to divide by 16 4 16 0 with a remainder of 4 Place these numbers in the following place holders 74 H O4A Therefore 74 H 4A APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 21 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Example B 3 Convert 2045 to hexadecimal form 2045 H First divide 16 into 2045 2045 16 127 with a remainder of 13 Convert the 13 to hexadecimal Figure B 1 13 H D and place it at the end of the hexadecimal number 2045 H D Now continue to divide by 16 127 16 7 with a remainder of 15 Convert the 15 to hexadecimal 15 H F and place it in the next place holder 2045 H FD Now continue to divide by 16 7 16 0 with a remainder of 7 Place these numbers in the following place holders 2045 H 0 7 E D Therefore 2045 H 7FD APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 22 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler B 3 3 ConvertinG SMALL HexapDecimaL NumsBers To DECIMAL To convert small hexadecimal numbers to
90. EPARATION PAGE 3 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 13 Dow Corning high vacuum grease 2 4 z lt d 3 Using a straight razor scrape any excess grease off the impactor plate This should leave enough grease to completely fill the indented reservoir area 4 Either insert the impactor plate directly into the ChemComb inlet for sampling or store the plates for future use If you insert the impactor plate into the inlet ensure that the greased reservoir area is facing the air flow stream The greased reservoir area should not be visible when looking into the ChemComb inlet Figure 3 14 If you are going to store the impactor plates for future use go to step 5 Figure 3 14 Impactor plate installed inside the inlet of a ChemComb cartridge SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 10 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 15 left Glass spacer for the ChemComb cartridge Figure 3 16 right HDPE spacer for the ChemComb cartridge 5 To keep the grease on the plates from contacting the flat bottom sides of the other impactor plates stack the greased plates in pairs with the greased plates facing each other 6 Make stacks of 16 plates and tape them together 7 Store each stack of 16 plates in a clean ziplocked bag until ready for shipment or use After every sampling run scrape out
91. ES Pace B 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler B 1 PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Main Program Register Codes Code Sampling Serial Control Operating Mode Internal Serial Number N A see code desc O o 60 70 10 950 T 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 100 60 70 o o 7 2 2 2 2 s aJ gt S ey era 4 Ie e e e e e e e e e 02 03 05 37 124 125 126 27 132 133 135 37 139 140 141 143 170 0 2 3 i Codes are described later in this Appendix APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 000 024 Default ps a Ee e Coe eee ee e ed a e ee e me me e oe e OO efen foe a o e mm poe fe e fe e e o e em fa e e e oe eee o e e e oe efem fo e e e mem a e e eee eo Tefen pe Pome ef e Codes are described later in this Appendix APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 025 049 On Tefen me fe fe om 026 027 Comm PRC 4 Anytime 028 Comm PRC 5 029 Comm PRC 6 030 Comm PRC 7 031 Comm PRC 8 032 Comm PRC 9 033 Comm PRC 10 034 Comm PRC 11 035 Comm PRC 12 036 Comm Interval sec 0 1 3 600 OO COO Ce mrn o wee o e Ce eme f e o e APPE
92. I O screen A 28 Download System Log screen A 29 Flow Calibration screen A 25 Flows Valves Pump screen A 24 T O Calibration screen A 26 Multiplexed Inputs screens A 29 Real Time Clock screen A 29 Sensor Calibration screen A 26 Service Menu calibration options A 21 Service Menu download system log options A 22 Service Menu exit service mode option A 22 Service Menu low level system information options A 22 Service Menu manual motion tests options A 21 Service Menu system maintenance routines options 6 4 A 21 System Check screen A 23 Temperatures screen A 24 TPIC Channels screen A 28 User Misc screen A 25 Service Mode 6 4 12 1 12 3 14 1 setting flow rates 7 28 7 30 shelter installation 12 channel 2 20 4 channel 2 5 site ID numbers 7 15 software 5 1 7 1 A 1 D 1 software loading D 1 software overview 5 1 A 1 software setup 7 1 spacers glass 3 10 HDPE 3 10 span 13 3 stand 2 38 stand hardware 2 38 statistics operating 8 4 status codes 8 1 B 13 status condition critical 8 2 status lights 8 1 stop bits 10 4 B 14 Stop Mode 5 2 6 1 6 4 7 1 Storage protocol 10 4 10 6 switching modes 7 1 7 31 system check 6 5 7 10 system configuration 1 9 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index continued T Teflon tape 4 2 temperature sensor ambient 2 36 12 4 TIME 2 Mode 7 20 TIME Mode 7 19 total sampling time 9 10 turning off 7 30 turning on 5 1 V View Data Mode 5 8 7 31
93. N Next key 7 20 None protocol 10 4 O O ring preparation 3 6 12 7 O rings 3 6 12 7 offset 13 3 operating manual 1 4 operating statistics 8 4 overview software 5 1 A 1 P parity 10 4 password protection 11 1 passwords high 11 3 low 11 2 petri dish 3 29 3 30 power failures 7 31 8 2 9 8 power switch 5 1 Prev key 7 20 procedures audit 6 4 12 1 program register codes PRC 10 13 10 15 B 1 programming the sampler 6 1 protocol RS232 10 4 D 1 pump 2 40 5 1 12 8 pump fan 2 40 8 9 R rainhoods 2 1 12 7 large 2 4 small 2 4 rating equipment IV RealTime protocol 10 5 10 7 relative humidity sensor 2 2 resetting data storage 13 2 instrument parameters 13 1 13 3 operating parameters 13 1 13 3 Revision A 000 VI Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Index continued passwords high 11 4 13 3 passwords low 11 4 13 3 routine maintenance 12 7 RPLoad D 2 RS232 Mode 7 27 RS232 port 10 2 10 7 RS232 protocol 10 4 D 1 RUN STOP key 7 1 S safety notice stand H 2 38 voltage H sampler setup 2 1 6 1 7 17 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 25 7 27 7 28 sampling continuous 7 10 Sampling Mode 5 2 7 3 sampling modes 7 16 7 17 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 25 7 27 sampling programs 7 16 screens software A 1 ADC Channels screen Service Mode A 27 Advanced Sampling Setup screen 7 21 A 13 Analog Input Setup screen 10 11 A 7 Analog Output Setup screen 10 13 A 7 Audit screen Serv
94. NDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 4 037 Storage Download Type 038 RS485 Instrument ID 039 Analog Input 1 Constant A Analog Input 2 Constant A 041 Analog Input 3 Constant A Analog Input 1 Constant B Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Program Register Codes 050 074 Description Units Current Analog Input 3 N A Average Analog Input 1 N A Average Analog Input 2 N A Average Analog Input 3 N A Analog Output PRC 1 fo Analog Output PRC 2 Analog Output PRC 3 a Analog Output Minimum 1 N A Analog Output Minimum 2 N A Analog Output Minimum 3 N A Analog Output Maximum 1 N A Analog Output Maximum 2 N A Analog Output Maximum 3 N A Analog Output Type 1 Code Analog Output Type 2 Code 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 57 058 059 061 062 063 065 Analog Output Type 3 Code 066 Contact Closure PRC 1 PRC Contact Closure PRC 2 PRC Range N A N A N A N A PRC PRC PRC 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 1E12 2 2 0 0 0 2 z9 22 PRC PRC Revision A 000 Edit Modes OO OO emcees we Pe fe Cajeme fee pes f mm or encncemmee poe fee f e 07 1E10 1E10 4 Contact Closure Comparison Value 1 Anytime Codes are described later in this Appendix APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2
95. Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 6 Slide two side bracket plates onto the top studs on the left side and right side of the sampler Figure 2 13 Figure 2 13 Side bracket plate positioned on the top studs of the shelter legs 7 Using the hardware provided one 1 1 4 20 nut for each support post secure the bracket plates to the legs Figure 2 14 Figure 2 14 Securing a side bracket plate to the top studs of the shelter legs SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 8 Attach two side bracket plates to the left and right legs on the sampler with two 2 1 4 20 x 1 2 socket screws and two 2 1 4 20 nuts Line up the side bracket plates with the screw holes located approximately 8 inches below the top studs Be sure to hold each screw with a screwdriver while turning the nuts with a nut driver Figure 2 15 Figure 2 15 Securing a bottom side bracket plate to the shelter legs 9 Locate the ChemComb shelter box with flow channels A D Slide it onto the studs on the two shelter legs on the front of the enclo sure Figure 2 16 Figure 2 16 Shelter box positioned on leg studs SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 10 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 10 Using the hardware provided one 1 1 4 20 nut for each support post secure the top half of the she
96. OutRly OFF Discrete Hardware Id PoleRly ON 1 ON 2 ON OFF OFF ON Temps FlowVal ON OFF Function Keys in Browse Mode Temps FlowVal ON OFF Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp fon screon in callration Flow A Calib Service Mode Range 10 0 12 2 Cur Flow 0 00 1 mn Mass 9 0 11 0 Set Flow 0 0 1 mn Num Points 3 Act Flow 0 00 1 mn For Streamline FTS Pressure 0 00 inH20 Const m 0 0000 Offset 0 574 Const b 0 0000 Span 1 000 Flow Flow Start More Function Keys in Browse Mode Flow Flow Start More FlowMin FlowMax EPA Cal Back Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 25 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 60 I O Calibration screen in calibration Service Mode Figure A 61 Sensor Calibration screen in calibration Service Mode I O Calib Mode SVC Input User Analog Outputs Offset 0 0013 0 0120 0 0139 0 0150 Span 0 9996 0 9953 0 9948 0 9949 Set 0 025 0 000 0 000 0 000 Relay OFF A O Calib Relay OFF ON Actual 0 025 0 00 0 00 0 00 FlowCal ON OFF SensCal Start Function Keys in Browse Mode FlowCal ON OFF SensCal Start Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Stat OK Sensor Calibration Current Actual Offset Amb Temp C 25 2 0 0 0 00 Amb Pres mmHg
97. Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Operating Manual 42 006439 Revision A April 2005 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEERoHS Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Patents Copyrights and Trademarks This instrumentation from Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc R amp P is covered by pending patents in the United States of America and other countries This documentation contains trade secrets and confidential information proprietary to R amp P
98. Positive Pin 14 Ground Pin 1 Input Channel 2 Positive Pin 3 Ground Pin 15 Input Channel 3 Positive Pin 17 Ground Pin 4 Refer to the Service Manual for a complete listing of pin assignments in the external connectors of the Partisol Speciation Sampler The Analog Input Setup screen Figure 10 7 allows the user to convert the input voltage levels into engineering units for display averaging and storage From the Main screen press lt F3 System gt lt F1 I O gt and then lt F3 A I gt to display the Analog Input Setup screen The sampler uses the following formulas to convert voltage level inputs 0 5 VDC to engineering units where x is the voltage being received Calculated Value A Bx Cx The Analog Input Setup screen allows the user to enter unique values for constants A B and C for each channel of analog input The calculated values shown at the bottom of the screen are the current results computed by the sampler using the A B and C constants entered by the user For example the user would assign a value of 0 to constant A 200 to constant B and 0 to constant C to convert a 0 5 VDC analog input voltage corresponding to an ozone Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 10 7 Analog Input Setup screen concentration of 0 1 000 ppb analog input 1 in Figure 10 7 The sampler shows results from implementing these constants
99. RTISOL STAND 40 DIA MOUNTING HOLES NN RS BOTTOM B 2 BO ss ne x E a Figure 2 71 Assembly A 2 Top front and top back 36 005479 eee a 4 Top right and top left 36 005476 C 4 Legs 36 005478 D 2 Bottom front and bottom back 36 005477 E 4 Hex head bolt 1 4 20 x 3 8 21 001291 0006 F 20 Hex head bolt 1 4 20 x 3 4 21 001291 0012 G 24 Flat washer 1 4 21 001275 H 24 Split ring washer 1 4 21 000848 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 39 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Y A fan and heater provide cooling and heating for the sampler 5 Tighten all hardware 6 Place the Partisol Speciation Sampler onto the stand and secure using E G and H hardware 2 4 HARDWARE CONSIDERATIONS A number of internal systems of the Partisol Speciation Sampler are designed to maintain acceptable operating conditions within the hardware The sample pump is always running when sampling takes place If the pump compartment temperature exceeds 15 C and the sample pump is running the pump fan in the pump compartment initiates The pump fan stops running once the temperature falls below 15 C However the pump fan will not initiate if the sample pump is not running regardless of the temperature measured in the pump compart ment When the device is not sampling the sample pump initiates only if the ambient temperature falls below 7 5
100. RTRIDGE FILTER LOG e ccecesececececeecueeeeeceuceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenseanes E 1 INDEX sat cette EAP A EA TE EE E AAAA E A A A TATAE ATT Pace XIII Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank Pace XIV Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 1 1 Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Section 1 Introduction The Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler is a 4 or 12 channel sampling platform for particulate matter related and gaseous species The device is based upon the same hardware and software platform as the other members of R amp P s Partisol family of samplers The sampler meets the U S Environmental Protection Agency USEPA chemical speciation requirements for PM 2 5 sampling The sampler is available in a basic 4 channel and an advanced 12 channel version to meet the sampling needs of different applications In these configurations the unit is designed to house R amp P s ChemComb Speciation Sampling Cartridges devel oped by Harvard University The Partisol Speciation Sampler is also available as a 12 channel Flexible Sampling Platform FSP for special project applications The programming of the sampler supports the following features e Channels can be grouped in the following ways Three groups of 4 flow channels Three groups of 3 flow channels Six groups of 2 fl
101. Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler x Wear powder free vinyl PVC gloves while install ing and removing the filter packs and Honeycomb denuders Figure 4 9 Filter pack outlet port top rim of the ChemComb cartridge inside a glass spacer 4 2 HoneYcoms System ASSEMBLY Follow these steps to assemble the Honeycomb system 1 To minimize contamination of the denuders you must assemble and disassemble Honeycomb systems under a clean air hood while wearing clean powder free gloves at all times Section 2 2 Place a glass spacer on several clean Kimwipes 3 Place the filter pack outlet port the top rim of the ChemComb cartridge inside the glass spacer Figure 4 9 4 Place inside the filter pack outlet port in sequence the following components for the filter pack Section 3 6 7 2 e f g One citric acid coated glass fiber filter One plastic filter screen One sodium carbonate coated glass fiber filter c d One plastic filter screen One Teflon filter smooth side up One plastic filter screen Honeycomb system housing 5 Fasten the housing and the top rim of the ChemComb system together 6 Hold the ChemComb at a slight angle SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 4 10 Denuder components package Aa HDPE ring spacers Bb Honeycomb
102. SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION TP TE VP VV VS Pump Temperature The pump compartment temperature sensor was not installed correctly or was out of range i e less than 60 C or greater than 70 C Electronics Temperature The temperature of the unit s electronics compartment was outside of its usual operating range i e less than 0 C or greater than 70 C Vacuum Pump Failed The sampler encountered a mechanical prob lem with the vacuum pump This is a cri ical status condition causing the sampler to enter the Error Operating Mode Section 5 1 and the status lights to blink continuously This status code will register only when the System Check feature is turned on Section 7 2 3 or during a leak check procedure Vacuum Vent Valve Failed The sampler encountered a mechanical problem with the vacuum vent valve This is a critical status condition causing the sampler to enter the Error Operating Mode Section 5 1 and the status lights to blink continuously This status code will register only when the System Check feature is turned on Section 7 2 3 or during a leak check procedure Vacuum System Failed The sampler encountered a mechanical problem with the vacuum system This is a c77 ica status condition causing the sampler to enter the Error Operating Mode Section 5 1 and the status lights to blink continuously This status code will register only when the System Check feature is turned on Section 7
103. SSURE Follow these steps to verify the ambient pressure 1 2 Ensure that the Audit screen Figure 12 4 is displayed on the sampler s keypad Determine the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg abso lute pressure not corrected to sea level Verify the sampler s ambient pressure by measuring the current ambient station SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Pace 12 4 Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler pressure in mm Hg with an external measurement device e To convert from Atmospheres 0 C to mm Hg multiply by 760 e To convert from millibars to mm Hg multiply by 0 75012 e To convert from inches Hg 32 F to mm Hg multiply by 25 4 3 Verify that the value for Amb Pres in the Audit screen is within 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pressure If this is not the case perform the ambient pressure calibration procedure de scribed in the Service Manual 12 1 5 Leak CHECK Follow these steps to perform a leak check 1 While in the Audit screen Figure 12 4 press lt F4 LeakChk gt to begin the leak check procedure 2 The unit will prompt you to remove the cartridge that is on the flow channel which is being checked and to install a leak plug on that flow channel Figure 12 8 The flow channel that is being checked is identified under Chnl in the Audit screen Install a leak plug on the proper channel Figure 12 9 Figure 12
104. STEM SOFTWARE Pace D 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Appendix E Cartridge Filter Log This appendix contains a cartridge log to keep track of all important readings associated with each sampling cartridge R amp P encourages users to make photocopies of the form or to use a similar format APPENDIX E CARTRIDGE FILTER LOG Pace E 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SWN OA 9V0 LXMC UOl e1JUSDUOD SeS ponad eunsodxy nsodxg uruonpuoo BuryBien 194 UONDE 0D SOd Jould eansodxJ 49414 Buybie 49414 eN U UO98 0D 1S0d Jajduies uonelsads 00EZ IPON OSIed dey SUONPUCD syam SUOHIPUOD SUONPUCD sybian 607 49 4 e6piyed SUONIPUOD JaqunN Buluopuog epuyeg J 4ll4 reu Pace E 2 APPENDIX E CARTRIDGE FILTER LOG Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index Symbols 12 channel flow channels 7 11 grouping 7 11 shelter installation 2 20 120 VAC operation 2 2 2 way serial communication C 1 240 VAC operation 2 2 4 channel flow channels 7 11 grouping 7 11 shelter installation 2 5 4 stage filter pack 1 2 3 32 assembly 4 5 disassembly 4 9 9 to 9 pin cable 6 3 10 2 10 6 D 1 A advanced features 1 2 ADVANCED mode 7 21 AK protocol 10 4 C 1 ambient temperature sensor 2 36 12 4 analog inputs 8 7 9 7 9 11 10 11 analog voltage output 10 12 anemometer wind vane 8 7 arrow
105. Sampled Volume m Minimum Ambient Temperature C Average Ambient Temperature C Maximum Ambient Temperature C Minimum Ambient Pressure mm Hg Average Ambient Pressure mm Hg Maximum Ambient Pressure mm Hg Minimum Ambient RH Average Ambient RH Maximum Ambient RH Average Wind Speed km h Average Wind Velocity km h Average Wind Direction degrees Average Analog Input engineering units Average Analog Input 2 engineering units Average Analog Input 3 engineering units Site ID1 32 character string Pace 10 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Site ID2 32 character string Power Failure Date yyyy mm dd Power Failure Time hh mm The number of fields in each record of filter data varies depending upon the number of power interruptions recorded If the sampler did not experience any power interruptions during sampling the unit omits all of the power interruptions fields shown above Otherwise filter data records contain fields for only the number of power interruptions encountered 10 4 Format oF InTERVAL Data RECORDS Each record of interval data contains the comma delimited data fields shown below Records are separated from each other by the carriage return ASCII 013 and line feed ASCII 010 characters Each interval data record contains Date at End of 5 Minute Period yyyy mm dd Time at End of 5 Minute Pe
106. Screen a DAC Channels Screen Discrete I O Screen TPIC Channels Screen Real Time Clock Screen Download System Log Download System Log Screen Exit Service Mode Re Enter Regular Mode Figure A 47 Hierarchy of screens available through Service menu Access the Service menu by pressing lt MENU gt with the sampler in its service operating mode APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 20 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 48 Service Menu screen with system mainte nance routines options Figure A 49 Service Menu screen with manual motion tests options Figure A 50 Service Menu screen with calibration options Revision A 000 Service Menu gt System Maintenance Routines Manual Motion Tests Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log Exit Service Mode Audit SysChck Service Menu System Maintenance Routines gt Manual Motion Tests Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log Exit Service Mode Temps FlowVal Misc Service Menu System Maintenance Routines Manual Motion Tests gt Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log Exit Service Mode FlowCal I O Cal SensCal APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 21 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 51 S
107. Set Sample Start Set Sample Stop Actual Sample Start The Stat field in the upper left hand corner of the screen shows the status conditions encountered dur ing sampling A value of OK indicates that the sampler did not encounter any status conditions Press lt F3 MoreDat gt twice to view the Cartridge Data Status Codes screen Figure 9 3 for an expla nation of the status codes recorded Section 8 1 contains acomplete listing of the single and double letter status codes that may be displayed in this field This field contains the number of the current record which is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen The Set Sample Start field is the time and date hh mm yyyy mm dd by default set by the user as the start time in the Filter Setup screen Section 5 2 The Set Sample Stop field is the time and date hh mm yyyy mm dd by default set by the user as the sample ending time in the Filter Setup screen This field shows the ac a starting time date hh mm yyyy mm dd by default at which the unit began sampling Figure 9 2 Filter Data Statistics screen Stat OK Filter Times Rec 199 Set Sample Start 17 52 1999 11 02 Set Sample Stop 17 56 1999 11 02 Actual Sample Start 17 52 1999 11 02 Actual Sample Stop 17 52 1999 11 02 Valid Elapsed Time 000 00 Total Elapsed Time 000 00 Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat DwnLoad SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA PAGE 9 3 O
108. Setup screen Figure 7 6 allows the user to set up the flow channels by group for each cartridge installed on the Partisol Speciation Sampler Groups are identified by numbers while flow channels are identified by letters Figure 7 6 Group Setup screen Stat OK Channels Group 2 Current Group 1 Group Setup Mode STOP Channels 12 Chan 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A 3B 3C 3D Grp 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 Grp Grp Function Keys in Browse Mode Grp Grp Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp While in the Main screen Figure 7 1 press lt F4 Sample gt to enter the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 In the Sample Setup screen press lt F2 Group gt to display the Group Setup screen The Group Setup screen displays the following information Channels Groups This parameter defines the number of flow channels per SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION group used for sampling Depending on the flow configura tion of your Partisol Speciation Sampler you can set this parameter to three groups of 4 flow channels three groups of 3 flow channels six groups of 2 flow channels or twelve groups of flow channel Figure 7 6 shows this screen set up for six groups of 2 flow channels See Figures 7 7 through 7 10 for detailed cartridge flow channel and group setup information Pace 7 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler
109. T DAMAGES EVEN IF IT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Pace Ill Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Equipment Rating The following information can be used to determine the power service requirements of this product Line Voltage 115 V 60 Hz 3 0 Amp 230 V 50 Hz 1 5 Amp Pace IV Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Electrical amp Safety Conformity The product has been tested by Intertek Testing Services and has been documented to be in compliance with the following U S and Canadian safety standards UL Standard 3101 1 CAN CSA C22 2 NO 1010 1 Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc certifies that this product operates in compliance with the EC Directive 89 336 EEC in reference to electrical emissions and immunity Specifically the equipment meets the requirements of EN61326 1997 Emissions and Immunity In addition the hardware has been tested for personal or fire safety hazards and meets the requirements of EN61010 1 1995 Safety in fulfillment of EC Directive 73 23 EEC Pace V Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Section Revision List Revision A 001 As R amp P instrumentation changes so do our Operating and Service manuals How ever these changes may affect only one aspect of an instrument while leaving the instrument as a whole unchanged To explain these individual changes to our
110. TER CODES Pace B 13 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler PRC 5 Status Code continued H 40000 TE Electronics Temperature Out of Range H 80000 Undefined Error H 100000 VP Vacuum Pump Failure H 200000 VV Vacuum Vent Valve Failure H 400000 D Audit Performed in Middle of Sample H 800000 VS Vacuum System Failure H 1000000 U Stop Key Pressed H 2000000 Bl Bank 1 Failure H 4000000 B2 Bank 2 Failure H 8000000 B3 Bank 3 Failure H 10000000 LA Flow A Leak Check Failed H 20000000 LB Flow B Leak Check Failed H 40000000 LC Flow C Leak Check Failed H 80000000 LD Flow D Leak Check Failed NOTE The current status code is the sum of all conditions that currently apply PRC 12 Comm Baud Rate 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 5 38400 PRC 13 Comm Word Length 0 5 1 6 2 7 3 8 PRC 14 Stop Bits 0 1 1 2 PRC 15 Comm Parity 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 14 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Revision A 000 PRC 16 Comm Flow Control 0 1 PRC 17 Comm Protocol 0 1 2 3 4 None Xon Xoff None AK Storage RealTime German PRC 37 Storage Download Type Filter Data Interval Data Input Data 0 1 2 PRC 63 64 65 Analog Output Type 1 2 3 0 1 VDC 0 2 VDC 0 5 VDC 0 1 2 PRC 68 69 Contact Closure Logic Type 1 2 0 1 AND OR PRC 72 73 Contact Closure Compari
111. TIME TIME2 EPISOD Episodic ADV Advanced and RS232 Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen to enter the Sample Setup screen With the unit in the Stop Operating Mode the user can change the sample setup from this screen Section 7 The stop times displayed below Stop indicate the time and date at which the sampler is currently programmed to end sample collection hh mm yy mm dd stop time and date by default for the group of cartridges listed to the left Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen to enter the Sample Setup screen With the unit in the Stop Operating Mode the user can change the starting and ending sample times and dates from this screen Figure 5 4 Main screen in the Sampling SAMP Operating Mode Stat OK Group 5 BASIC Channel 3A Flow Channel 3B Flow Partisol 2300 09 02 36 1999 11 23 9 9 l m Vol 10 9 1 m Vol Mode SAMP 09 41 99 11 23 87 8 1 88 1 1 Stop StCode Stats System Data Sample When in the SAMP mode the sampler displays the following fields on the Main screen Stat Mode SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW The value of the status code in the upper left hand comer of the Main screen to the right of Stat indicates whether the unit is operating properly A value of OK indicates that all functions are pro ceeding normally The sampler displays the current operating mode in the upper r
112. TION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION PAGE 3 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 2 Clean air positive pressure hood e Top fan to minimize the workers exposure to the methanol in the exhaust air from the hood e Clean drying air system Pump to supply clean air Sodium carbonate and citric acid coated glass wool cylinders to absorb gases from the supply air and a filter to remove the particles Manifold for honeycomb drying Figures 3 3 and 3 4 SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 3 Schematic Drying cap for manifold drawing of a drying cap for manifold Polyethylene cap with at least 6 holes CAPLUG size RCL 5 1 2 plastic tubing Polyethylene cap CAPLUG size EC 32 Figure 3 4 Drying caps for the manifold If you are using a glove box instead of a clean air hood you must place pieces of sodium carbonate and citric acid coated glass fiber paper inside the box to absorb the target air species in the glove box Besure to leave the coated paper inside the glove box for at least 5 minutes before using it for denuder coating assembly and disassembly of the honeycomb system or denuder extraction This will allow the paper to absorb the acid gases and ammonia in the hood SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace
113. The Time Form determines the form in which the sampler displays time The default is hh mm ss The unit also allows time to be displayed as hh mm ss Ifno keys are pressed for 3 hours and the Auto Run feature is ON the unit will automatically enter the Wait or Sampling Mode The Curr Time parameter is the current local time or other standard time selected by the user expressed by default as hh mm ss When editing this parameter treat each part of the time as a separate field Pace 7 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Curr Date The Curr Date parameter is the current local date expressed by default as yy mm dd When editing this parameter treat each part of the date as a separate field The System Setup screen also provides access to the sampler s input and output capabilities site identification information password protection settings Section 11 and system information 7 2 2 SAMPLE SETUP SCREEN The Sample Setup screen allows the user to define global sampling parameters for the operation of the Partisol Speciation Sampler such as the sample definition type default programming method the default sample start time and duration and the default repeat time and filter type Press lt F4 Sample gt when in the Main screen Figure 7 1 to enter the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 All of the fields in the Sample Setup screen can be edited when the
114. The range of choices includes 0 1 0 2 or 0 5 VDC Press lt F1 List gt and lt F2 List gt when in the Edit Mode to choose the desired output format The default setting for output format is 0 5 VDC For voltage output the minimum input impedance is 10 KO Pace 10 13 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 10 9 RS485 Setup screen The pin assignments on the User I O connector for analog output are as follows see the Service Manual for complete listing of pin out definitions Output Channel 1 Positive Pin 9 Ground Pin 21 Output Channel 2 Positive Pin 20 Ground Pin 7 Output Channel 3 Positive Pin 6 Ground Pin 18 Pressing lt F1 RS232 gt lt F2 RS485 gt lt F3 A I gt or lt F5 Contact gt allows the user direct access to the other output related screens without having to return to the Setup screen 10 8 RS485 Input Output An RS485 port on the front panel of the Partisol Speciation Sampler Figure 10 4 provides future connection options with other R amp P instrumentation While in the Main screen press lt F3 System gt to reach the System Setup screen Figure 10 1 From the System Setup screen press lt F 1 I O gt to display the System Setup I O screen Figure 10 2 From the System Setup I O screen press lt F2 RS485 gt to display the RS485 Setup screen Figure 10 9 The RS485 Setup screen contains one user definable field defined as follows Station This fi
115. Times Day NextDay Next Hr Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp Sample will start at Each sample will collect for Revision A 000 This parameter defines the time of day that the Partisol Speciation Sampler will begin sampling on the cartridges or group of cartridges This start time by default is the time selected in the Sample Setup screen This parameter displays the sampling duration in hours The sampler will use the default duration from the Sample Setup screen Sampling is always continuous in the Basic sampling program unless a Repeat Time offset was selected in the Sample Setup screen The Partisol Speciation Sampler will automatically begin and end sampling according to the start time and sample collection time displayed in the Basic Sampling Setup screen During sampling the screen will show the conditions for the cartridge or group of cartridges that are in sampling position In this screen the lt F5 Next Hr gt soft key allows the user to quickly start a 24 hour sample at the top of the next hour SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 18 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 15 Time Sam pling Setup screen 7 3 2 Time SAMPLING Setup SCREEN The Time Sampling Setup screen Figure 7 15 will display if the Sample Definition Method in the Sample Setup screen was entered as TIME The Time samp
116. abeled A and a bank valve with attached hoses 12 Slide pipe A into the slot labeled A on the top of the unit Figure 2 47 Figure 2 47 Slide pipe A into the connector labeled A on the top of the unit SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 26 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 48 Finger tighten the nut at the bottom of pipe A Figure 2 49 Tighten the nut 1 4 turn past finger tight with a crescent wrench 13 There are two 2 nuts attached to each pipe Slide the bottom nut down the pipe and finger tighten it Figure 2 48 Then using a crescent wrench tighten the nut 1 4 turn past finger tight Figure 2 49 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 27 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 14 Slide pipe B into the slot labeled B on the top of the unit Figure 2 50 Repeat step 13 Figure 2 50 Slide pipe B into the connector labeled B on the top of the unit 15 Slide pipe C into the slot labeled C on the top of the unit Repeat step 13 16 Slide pipe D into the slot labeled D on the top of the unit Repeat step 13 17 Slide the bank valve onto the top of the pipes Figure 2 51 Figure 2 51 Slide the bank valve onto the top of the four pipes SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 28 Revision A 000 Operating Man
117. ailable through the Service Menu Upon entering the Service Mode the sampler turns off most of its routine control systems The Partisol Model 2300 Service Manual contains maintenance and calibra tion routines that can be performed while in the Service Mode Service Menu gt System Maintenance Routines Manual Motion Tests Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log Exit Service Mode Audit SysChck 14 2 LEAVING THE SERVICE MopE To leave the Service Mode and return to the normal operation of the sampler press lt MENU gt This causes the Service Menu screen to be displayed Figure 14 3 Then use the arrow keys 1 and T to move the screen s selection indicator to the line labeled Exit Service Mode With the pointer in this position press lt ENTER gt The unit then returns to its usual operating configuration re establishing the usual control over its functions Pace 14 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 1 Hierarchy of screens Appendix A Overview of Partisol Model 2300 Software Screens This appendix contains all the software screens displayed by the Partisol Speciation Sampler along with the hierarchy of screens The later part of this appendix shows the menu structure and screens contained in the unit s Service Mode Title screen Main screen Filter Data Status Codes screen Sample Setup Temperatur
118. ains the average of analog input 3 engineering units recorded during the sampling period PAGE 9 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 9 1 5 Power FAILURES SCREEN Press lt F3 MoreDat gt when in the Cartridge Data Averages screen to enter the Power Failures screen Figure 9 6 The sampler remains in the same record of filter data when switching among filter data related screens The Power Failures screen displays the starting time date hh mm yyyy mm dd by default of up to 10 power outages of durations longer than 60 seconds that occurred during the sampling period of the current cartridge filter data record Figure 9 6 Power Failures s r e Power Failures Rec 199 No power failures occurred Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat 9 2 InTERVAL DATA SCREEN The Partisol Speciation Sampler stores 5 minute averaged ambient temperature filter temperature ambient pressure and flow rate measurements as interval data It writes a new record of interval data every 5 minutes on a continuous basis and has a capacity of 16 days before it overwrites the oldest records The unit displays interval data records in the Interval Data screen Figure 9 7 You can reach the Interval Data screen in two ways Press lt F4 IntvDat gt from one of the filter data screens to reach the Interval Data screen Also from the Main screen Figure 9 1 press lt F5 Data gt to enter
119. alibration Failed H 1000 Coeff of Variation for Flow 1 Too High H 2000 Coeff of Variation for Flow 2 Too High H 8000 Coeff of Variation for Flow 4 Too High H 100000 Vacuum Pump Failure H 200000 Vacuum Vent Valve Failure H 400000 Audit Performed in Middle of Sample APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 33 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 34 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Appendix C Two Way Serial Communication The Partisol Speciation Sampler supports two serial communication protocols the AK Protocol and the German Ambient Network Protocol These permit a locally or remotely located computer to obtain information digitally from the unit and are described in this appendix C 1 AK ProtocoL The AK Protocol is the most powerful RS232 mode in the Partisol Speciation Sampler It not only allows the user to query the present value of any system variable remotely but also permits the user to change the values of system variables and download information from the internal data logger The RPComm software supplied with the unit uses this protocol for two way communication directly to a computer or through a modem The following commands of the AK Protocol are presented in detail in the following pages AREG Ask Register Co
120. allel to the grooved track on either side of the collar Figure 4 16 Ensure that the collar is properly positioned 0 38 inches 4 Using a 7 64 hex wrench tighten the screw in the corner of the collar Figure 4 17 Figure 4 17 Tighten the collar s screw with a 7 64 hex wrench SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 4 3 2 INSTALLING CHEmComs CARTRIDGES Follow these steps to install a ChemComb cartridge into the Partisol Speciation Sampler 1 Open the ChemComb shelter door Figure 4 18 Figure 4 18 ChemComb shelter with door open 2 Line up the groove in the collar on the ChemComb with the edges of the tray inside the shelter box and slide the ChemComb car tridge onto the tray Figures 4 19 and 4 20 Figure 4 19 Aligning the groove of the collar on the ChemComb with the edges of the tray inside the shelter box SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 12 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 4 20 Sliding the ChemComb cartridge onto the tray 3 Ensure that the inlet port on the ChemComb fits securely inside the hose connection Figures 4 21 and 4 22 ii 7 Figure 4 21 The inlet port on the ChemComb should fit securely inside the hose connection SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 13 Revision A 000 Ope
121. ampler Partisol Speciation enclosure Shelter assembly 4 or 12 channel Hose assembly 4 or 12 channel 2 Rainhoods and associated hardware Partisol stand Ambient temperature sensor and cable Relative humidity sensor Fuses Leak check plugs 4 or 12 channel Operating software diskette 9 to 9 pin RS232 computer cable 2 Operating manuals Service manual 2 2 SETTING Up THE SAMPLER Follow these steps to set up the unit 1 Cut any tie wraps and remove any transport restraints 2 Install the relative humidity sensor Section 2 2 1 3 Install the large rainhood Section 2 2 2 3 Install the small rainhood Section 2 2 3 4 Install the ChemComb shelter Section 2 2 4 5 Connect the unit to the electric supply Be sure to fulfill all safety and regulatory requirements for the hardware SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 1 left 9 pin connector for the relative humidity sensor Figure 2 2 right The relative humidity sensor plugged into its connector The wires inside the power cord are defined by the following colors which are different for 115 and 230 VAC configurations LIS VAC 230 VAC Line Black or Brown Brown Neutral White or Blue Blue Common Ground Green or Green Yellow Green Yellow For 7 5 VAC configurations of the Partisol Speciation Sampler the standard three pronged U S plug is provided at the end of
122. anced Sampling Setup screen Section 7 3 4 With the values entered in the Episodic Sampling screen shown in Figure 7 20 the sampler will begin sampling at 11 24 on November 4 1999 if the ambient temperature is between 10 and 40 C and the relative humidity RH is between 80 and 95 The unit will continue to sample on this group of cartridges as long as these conditions are met until Stat OK Episodic Setup Mode STOP Current Time 10 24 99 11 04 Start Event Capture 11 24 99 11 04 Stop Event Capture 11 28 99 11 04 Cond TEMP SRH Min 10 00 80 00 0 00 Max 40 00 95 00 0 00 Times Hour Day Reset Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Hour Day Reset Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 26 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler the Stop Event Capture time 11 28 If either of these conditions are not met during the interval between the Start Event Capture and Stop Event Capture times the sampler will not pull an air stream through that group of cartridges Sampling will begin again only if the temperature and relative humidity conditions are within the Min and Max values This sampling cycle will continue until there are no more cartridges available or until the Stop Event Capture time The unit will then enter the Done Mode until reprogrammed Additionally you can set up different groups of
123. and then asks the user to Press any key to continue and the user doesn t press a key then the unit will continue normal operation after 5 minutes If a prompt screen appears that gives the user a choice of Yes or No and the user doesn t press a key then the unit will automatically choose No and continue normal operation after 5 minutes If a prompt screen appears that gives the user a choice of different variables and the user doesn t press a key then the unit will remain in that prompt screen and wait for the user to press a key 7 6 OPERATION AFTER Power FAILURE The Partisol Speciation Sampler performs the following actions upon resumption of power if a power failure occurs while the sampler is in its Sampling Operating Mode e Ifthe power outage is longer than 60 seconds the hardware registers a zZ status condition Section 8 1 and stores the starting time and date of the power failure in the current record of filter data Section 9 1 SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 31 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler e Ifending sampling conditions are not yet reached for the cartridge that is in sampling position upon resumption of the power supply the sampler continues its sampling program in the Sampling Operating Mode The Z status condition will be retained in the filter data record Otherwise depending upon how much time has passed the unit
124. aning Previously Used Impactor Plates 3 8 3 2 6 3 Coating the Impactor Plates 0 ccccecseeceeseeess 3 9 3 2 7 Glass Spacers and HDPE Spacers 0 0eseeeee 3 10 3 3 Honeycomb Denuder Coating and Extraction Procedures 3 11 3 3 1 Denuder Pre Coating Procedure 2 0ceeeseeteeee 3 12 3 3 2 Denuder Coating Procedure c ceeeeeeesseetees 3 14 3 3 3 Denuder Extraction Procedure seses 3 24 3 3 4 Coating and Extraction Concerns 0 eeeeeeeeee 3 28 3 4 Filter Handling and Initial Inspection ss c cceeeeeeees 3 29 3 5 Pre Sampling Filter Equilibration ssecssesseceeeceeeeeeees 3 30 PAGE IX Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Table of Contents continued 3 6 Pre Sampling Filter Weighing eeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 30 3 7 Post Collection Filter Equilibration cccccsccccccseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 33 3 8 Post Collection Filter Weighing cssccsecssecseeeeeeeeeees 3 34 3 9 Computation of Mass Concentration escseeseeceeeeeeees 3 35 SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE cccccccesceseeseececeeeeceseeeeeaeeees 4 1 4 1 Filter Pack Outlet Port Assembly 222 cccsessseecceeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 4 2 Honeycomb System Assembly c cccccssseneeceeeeeesnseceeneeneees 4 5 4 3 Honeycomb System Disa
125. appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended RS Para 4 Not used RS Para 5 Not used RS Para 6 Not used oe ee e e ee e e Set Function command where xx 4 digit Set Function command with represents a 2 digit code These the 2 digit xx code corresponding to codes are defined below the function that was set Lee EMES 10 lt ETX gt ASCII code 003 2 digit Channel Number as defined by RS Para 2 ofo Number of current status conditions Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 3 e oO LISTING OF FUNCTION CODES xx 11 Run 12 Stop Set Time Set Date Switch to None RS232 Mode wo APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler AK Protocol Ask Storage Command ASTO COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 2 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from instrument In this case lt CR gt and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended RS Para 4 Not used RS Para 5 Not used RS Para 6 Not used Transmissi
126. artisol Speciation Sampler MAIN POWER RS485 SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 30 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 5 AUTOMATIC SWITCHING OF Epit MODES AND SCREENS The Partisol Speciation Sampler takes a number of actions automatically during periods of inactivity e Any time more than 15 minutes pass since the last keystroke was entered on the keypad the backlighting of the LCD liquid crystal display dims When this occurs press any key to reactivate the screen s backlighting e Ifthe sampler is left in the Edit Mode for more than 5 minutes without any user keystrokes it automatically reverts to the Browse Mode e Whenever the sampler remains in a screen other than the Main screen for longer than 15 minutes without any user keystrokes the unit automati cally reverts to the Main screen Ifno keys are pressed for 3 hours and the Auto Run feature in the System Setup screen is ON the unit will automatically enter the Wait or Sampling Mode e Ifa prompt screen such as a screen that asks you to choose Yes or No is displayed for 5 minutes without any action by the user the user doesn t make a choice or push any buttons then the unit will either answer the prompt itself and resume operation or wait for the user to take action depending on the type of prompt screen that appears Ifa prompt screen appears that gives the user a message
127. ator AND or OR for integer variables such as the current status condition a comparison operator lt lt gt gt and lt gt and a constant with which the unit compares the resulting value of the left hand operations the result of the comparison for an outputchannelis true the unit transmits 5 VDC otherwise the voltage transmitted by an output channel is 0 VDC Stat OK Contact Closure Setup Variable BitOp BitVal Comp CompVal 1 None AND 0 lt 0 00 2 None AND 0 lt 0 00 RS232 RS485 A I A O Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 RS485 A I A O Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 15 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler The screen contains the following user definable fields for each channel of logic level output NOTE When in the Edit Mode press lt F1 List gt and lt F2 List gt to select from a list of predefined settings for Vari able BitOp and Comp Variable BitOp Y Select OR as the BitOp and 0 as the BitVal if no masking is desired Masking is only performed with integer program register codes PRCs BitVal Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT This is the PRC Appendix B of the variable whose current value is to be tested by the unit If the variable selected is an integer the user can apply a bit wise AND or OR mas
128. ave your new high password The sampler should beep three times to indicate that the password has been successfully changed If you do not enter a new high password correctly the unit will not beep when you press lt ENTER gt and the cursor will move back to the line labeled New Hi Psw Press lt ESC gt to leave the Password Setup screen in case of difficulties NOTE Password protection can be turned on or off from any screen 11 2 Resettinc Low AND Hich Passworps If you misplace or forget the low and high passwords you can reset both high and low passwords to 100000 by pressing lt F4 gt when the unit displays the Title screen Figure 11 5 Note that lt F4 gt is not labeled with any text this is a precaution taken to guard against unwanted use of this feature Resetting the low and high passwords does not affect the current protection state of the unit and does zo change any of the sampler s other parameters Partisol 2300 12 Channel Speciation Air Sampler Version 0 700 Date Nov 2 1999 Copyright 1999 Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc RDfault RData Reset SECTION 11 PAssworD PROTECTION Pace 11 4 Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 12 1 Master Menu screen Figure 12 2 Service Mode Confirmation screen Section 12 Verification Procedures and Routine Maintenance This section explains how to enter the Service Mode an
129. ayed on the unit s screen The unit will automatically verify the flow rate SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Pace 12 6 Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 2 A Pass or Fail message will display at the end of the flow verification procedure If a Fail message is displayed refer to the Service Manual If a Pass message is displayed at the end of the flow verification procedure proceed to step 3 3 Press lt F2 Chan gt to switch the unit to the next flow channel Press lt F5 Start gt and follow the instructions displayed on the unit s screen Repeat the flow verification procedure for all of the flow channels 12 2 Routine MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 12 2 1 CHemComs MAINTENANCE O Ring Maintenance New ChemComb O rings require a thin coating of silicon vacuum grease Periodi cally re grease the O rings as needed Follow these steps to apply grease to the O rings 1 Clean the O rings with a moist Kimwipe if necessary 2 Place a small amount of grease on end of your index finger and rub it onto the O ring Use your thumb and index finger to spread the grease until it covers the entire surface of the O ring 3 Wipe the excess grease from your fingers and then use your cleaned fingers to rub any excess grease from O rings 12 2 2 OTHER Routine MAINTENANCE The routine maintenance of the Partisol Speciation Sampler consists of th
130. ays of input data before it overwrites the oldest records The unit displays input data records in the Input Data screen Figure 9 8 While in the Interval Data screen Figure 9 7 press lt F4 InptDat gt to reach the Input Data screen The Input Data screen contains the following information Stat SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA The Stat field in the upper left hand corner of the screen shows the status conditions encountered dur ing exposure of the sample filter PAGE 9 9 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Revision A 000 Figure 9 8 Input Data screen Stat OK Input Data Rec 16 Record Time Valid 000 00 10 30 1999 11 04 AmbT 22 4 C Total 000 00 Pres 755 mmHg WSpd 0 1 km h RH 27 7 WVel 0 1 km h AI1l 0 00 WDir o deg AI2 0 00 AI3 0 00 Rec Rec FiltDat DwnLoad Rec This field contains the number of the current record Record Time Valid AmbT Total Pres WSpd SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA which is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen This field contains the time date hh mm yyyy mm dd by default at which the sampler stored the current record of input data This field contains the elapsed sampling time within the averaging storage interval hh mm by default during which the sampler operated normally i e without any status conditions This field contains the average ambient temp
131. ber values The hexadecimal number system is a base 16 number system that uses 16 symbols 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F Figure B 1 to represent number values This can make simple addition and subtraction a bit confusing B 3 1 P Lace HoLpers In the hexadecimal number system when the value of a number exceeds 15 which is represented by F you must pay attention to the number s place holder A place holder is the number or symbol that is placed in front of a base number to represent larger numerical values Example B 1 ruber syetom and its number system and its Decimal Hexadecimal hexadecimal equivalent 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MOHOAWPOCAIDUWUAWNHHK O N A APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 19 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler In the decimal number system place holders increase by a value of 10 If we use the decimal number system in Example B 1 the numerical values of the place holders will increase bya value of 10 In the first row of Example B 1 the place holder is 0 which makes the decimal numerical value of the first number in that row 0 10 0 0 In the second row the place holder is 1 so the decimal numerical value of the first number in that row is 1 10 0 10 The place holder in the third row is 2 which makes the decimal numerical value of the first number in that row 2 10 0
132. cartridges with various sampling conditions The unit will sample simultaneously on different cartridges depending on the programmed sampling conditions 7 3 6 RS232 Procram Move If you select RS232 as the Sample Definition Method in the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 the unit will not display a specific sampling setup screen When RS232 is selected in the Sample Setup screen pressing the lt F4 Sample gt soft function key in the Main screen will display a Warning Confirmation screen Figure 7 13 indicating that no time or conditional setup is required for RS232 sampling In the RS232 program the sampler operates according to the present value of Program Register Code 170 Sampling Serial Control See Appendix B for a more detailed explanation of Program Register Code 170 7 3 7 FILTER TIMES SCREEN The Filter Times screen Figure 7 21 is accessible from any of the specific sampling setup screens Press lt F1 Times gt while in the any of the specific sampling setup screens to enter the Filter Times screen This screen is used mainly as a troubleshoot ing screen to help users know when their unit actually will begin and end sampling on each of the cartridges However you may use the screen as a basic reference tool while your unit is functioning properly to be sure that your unit is correctly programmed to sample at the times that were set in the Sample Setup screen Section 7 2 1 To view all ofthe starting and ending
133. constant m FTS constant b Flow set point Input data averaging period Date format Time format Default start time Default duration Default repeat time Default filter type Sampling type Sampling start time Sampling stop time Site ID 1 Site ID 2 Flow mode 13 3 Resettinc Data STORAGE Revision A 000 8 1 none none AK 100000 100000 none 0 l min 3 15 l min 18 4 l min 0 H O 0 0 10 l min 30 min yy mm dd hh mm 00 00 24 00 24 00 P Basic 00 00 00 00 0 0 Err Pressing lt F2 RData gt while in the Title screen Figure 13 1 causes the sampler to clear the filter data interval data and input data storage buffers If you choose this selection it does zofclear the sampler s operating parameters or channel definitions SECTION 13 RESETTING THE SAMPLER Pace 13 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 13 4 Resetrinc Low AND HicH Passworps If you misplace the low and high passwords you can reset both of these to 100000 by pressing lt F4 gt when the unit displays the Title screen Figure 13 1 Note that lt F4 gt is not labeled with any text this is a precaution taken to guard against unwanted use of this feature Resetting the low and high passwords does not affect the current protection state of the unit and does zoz change any other instrument parameters 13 5 RESETTING ALL INSTRUMENT PARAMETERS IMPORTANT Extreme care must be used wh
134. creen 10 14 A 6 Sample Options screen 7 9 A 10 Sample Setup screen 7 7 A 9 Sensor Calibration screen Service Mode A 26 Service Menu calibration options A 21 Service Menu download system log options A 22 Service Menu exit service mode option 14 2 A 22 Service Menu low level system information options Service Menu manual motion tests options A 21 Service Menu screen hierarchy A 20 Service Menu system maintenance routines options Site Identification screen 7 15 A 8 Status Codes screen 8 1 A 2 System Check screen Service Mode 6 5 A 23 System Information screen 7 15 A 9 System Setup I O screen 10 1 A 5 System Setup screen 5 10 11 1 A 4 System Statistics screen 8 8 A 4 Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen 8 4 A 3 Temperatures screen Service Mode A 24 Time 2 Sampling Setup screen 7 20 A 13 Time Sampling Setup screen 7 19 A 12 Title screen 5 2 A 2 TPIC Channels screen Service Mode A 28 User I O Statistics screen 8 6 A 3 User Misc screen Service Mode A 25 Wind Statistics screen 8 7 A 4 sensor ambient temperature 2 36 12 4 relative humidity 2 2 serial numbers cartridges 7 28 unit 7 15 service manual 6 6 10 7 10 11 10 14 14 2 Service Menu screens 6 4 14 1 A 20 Revision A 000 A 22 12 2 14 2 A 21 VIII Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index continued ADC Channels screen A 27 Audit screen A 23 DAC Channels screen A 27 Discrete
135. customers R amp P will update only those sections of its Operating and Service manuals that are affected by the instrument updates or improvements As each manual section changes so does its revision number which is located at the top right corner of each page of each section To help our customers keep track of the changes to the Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler and its operating manual following is a list of the manual sections with their respective revision numbers Section Number and Description Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 Section 10 Section 11 Section 12 Section 13 Section 14 Introduction Hardware Installation Denuder Filter and Cartridge Preparation Cartridge Handling and Exchange Software Overview Sampler Operation Software Setup and Operation Operating Information Viewing Stored Data Data Input and Output Password Protection Verification Procedures and Routine Maintenance Resetting the Sampler Service Menu Revision Number A 000 A 000 A 000 A 000 A 000 A 000 A 000 A 000 A 000 A 000 A 000 A 001 A 000 A 000 Pace VI Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Section Number and Description Revision Number Appendix A Overview of Partisol Model 2300 A 000 Software Screens Appendix B Program Register Codes A 0
136. d Screens 7 31 7 6 Operation After Power Failure seeeeesseeeeeeeneeeeeeees 7 31 SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION cccccccecsesessssceceeeesescesesseesececeeeeeeseusanaees 8 1 8 1 Status CodeS esros sennae anne aa EAEE O eE EE 8 1 8 2 Operating Statistics Screens sssssrssserrrrrrruneerrnrnnrreseseeesess 8 4 8 2 1 Temperature and Pressure Statistics Screen 8 4 8 2 2 Flow Statistics Screen cccccccecccscccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 5 8 2 3 User I O Statistics Screen ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 8 6 8 2 4 Wind Statisties SCMeel ssa csccicssesteeruietsdncedranioresesiarenses 8 7 8 2 5 System Statistics SCS OM ts cosetarstavnsscrermautananisalourenaacsntwees 8 8 SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA cccccccscccecccecceeececceceeeceecssesceeeseceeeeseseeess 9 1 9 1 Cartridge Data meiren a 9 2 9 1 1 Filter Data Statistics Screen 00 cccceecesceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 3 9 1 2 Filter Data Screen ccccsecsecceeeceeceeeceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeess 9 4 9 1 3 Cartridge Data Status Codes Screen 0 eee 9 5 9 1 4 Cartridge Data Averages Screen seess 9 6 9 1 5 Power Failures Screen ceceseeseneeccecceeeeceeceeeeeeeeees 9 8 9 2 Interval Data Screen 00 0 cceecccccccccecccecceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeteeeteeeenetenes 9 8 9 3 Input Data Screen iis fooi E a EE 9 9 SECTION 10 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT 0
137. d calibrate your Partisol Speciation Sampler s ambient air temperature and pressure and flow channels 12 1 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES The following verification procedures use the sampler s Audit screen which is accessed through the Service Mode while the unit is in the Stop Mode However you may perform an audit and leak check while the unit is in the Wait or Sampling modes by pressing lt RUN STOP gt 12 1 1 ENTERING THE SERVICE Mope Stop Mope Follow these steps to enter the Service Mode while in the Stop Mode 1 When the unit is in Stop Mode press lt MENU gt to enter the Master Menu screen Figure 12 1 Master Menu gt Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage Service Mode StCode 2 While in the Master Menu screen press the down arrow J until Service Mode is selected Press lt ENTER gt The unit will then display the Service Mode Confirmation screen Figure 12 2 Master Menu Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage gt Service Mode Are you sure Yes No SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Pace 12 1 Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 3 Press lt F3 Yes gt The unit will now display the Service Menu screen Figure 12 3 Figure 12 3 Service Menu screen Service Menu gt System Maintenance Routines Manual Mot
138. del 2300 Speciation Sampler IMPORTANT NOTE The Partisol Speciation Sampler contains three internal databases filter data interval data and input data Section 9 When downloading stored information using the ASTO and SSTO commands of the AK Protocol the user must specify which database is to be accessed by setting the value of Program Register Code 31 Appendix B to either 0 for filter data 1 for interval data or 2 for input data The following pages detail the format of the transmission and response messages of the commands listed above APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler AK Protocol Ask Register Command AREG COM 2 WAY SETTINGS ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 RS Para 1 digit in length ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Romarg Channel Number is always 2 digits in length Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from instrument In this case lt CR gt and RS Para 3 lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended CAO 0 soe ASCicode oo code 002 sme soe ASci code 002 code 002 F 1 digit Station Number RS mr 1 digit Station Number RS Para 1 Para 1 A Ask Register command 4 digit Ask Register command
139. denuders Cc metal spring and Dd glass spacer 7 Inside the ChemComb body housing place the following compo nents in sequence Figure 4 10 gt mha o Qa o FS PB p d o One metal spring One HDPE ring spacer One citric acid coated denuder One HDPE ring spacer One sodium carbonate coated denuder One HDPE ring spacer One glass spacer One HDPE ring spacer A greased inlet impactor plate NOTE If you will be using only one coated denuder place a glass spacer before and after the denuder For example you would insert the following equipment into the body housing using this sequence 1 metal spring 2 glass spacer 3 HDPE ring spacer 4 coated Honeycomb denuder 5 HDPE ring spacer 6 glass spacer 7 HDPE ring spacer 8 inlet impactor plate SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 8 Slide the inlet onto the housing and secure it with the side clips 9 Place plastic caps on both ends of the system to exclude ambient air Figure 4 11 Figure 4 11 ChemComb cartridge with small caps on both inlet and outlet ports 10 Place labels on the outside of the ChemComb housing Include two labels that list the coatings used for the denuders and three labels to list the filter types 4 3 _HoneyYcomsB System DISASSEMBLY The following equipment and materials are required for disassembling the Hon
140. displayed on the unit s screen The unit will auto matically verify the flow rate A Pass or Fail message will display at the end of the flow verification procedure If a Fail message is displayed refer to the Service Manual If a Pass message is displayed at the end of the flow verification procedure proceed to step 13 13 Press lt F2 Chan gt to switch the unit to the next flow channel SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION Press lt F5 Audit gt and follow the instructions displayed on the unit s screen Repeat the flow verification procedure for all of the flow channels Pace 6 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION Pace 6 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 1 Main screen with unit in Stop Operating Mode Section 7 Software Setup and Operation This section describes the parameter settings in the software screens that affect the sampler s basic operation It also describes the unit s operational modes Do not attempt the procedures described in this section until carrying out the steps in Sections 2 3 and 4 Appendix A contains all of the sampler s screens and Appendix B provides a listing of the unit s program register codes PRCs 7 141 Mobes oF OPERATION The Partisol Speciation Sampler displays its current operating mode in th
141. e List List Bksp ChSign 10 1 System Setup I O SCREEN While in the Main screen press lt F3 System gt to reach the System Setup screen Figure 10 1 From the System Setup screen press lt F1 I O gt to display the System Setup I O screen Figure 10 2 The function keys available at the bottom of the System Setup I O screen provide access to specialized screens for RS232 lt F1 RS232 gt and RS485 lt F2 RS485 gt output capabilities analog input lt F3 A I gt analog output lt F4 A O gt and Contact Closure lt F5 Contact gt output capabilities By selecting these function keys the user can move from one type of I O screen to another without having to backtrack to the System Setup screen Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 10 2 System Setup I O screen with the I O menu available on the bottom of the screen Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Stat OK System Setup Mode STOP Average Temp 99 Standard Temp 99 Average Pres 999 Standard Pres 999 Date Form yy mm dd Average Time 30 Time Form Auto Run NO Curr Time 09 16 37 Curr Date 99 11 04 RS232 RS485 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 RS485 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign 10 2 DownLoapinG STORED DATA R amp P supplies the Partisol Speciation Sa
142. e Pressure Stats screen System Setup screen screen Statistics screen Flow Statistics screen User I O Stats screen Wind Statistics screen System Statistics screen System Setup I O screen Site Identification screen Password Setup screen System Information screen RS232 Setup screen RS232 Real Time Data screen RS485 Setup screen Analog Input Setup screen Analog Output Setup screen Contact Closure Setup screen Sample Options screen Group Setup screen Cartridge List Setup screen APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Specific Sampling Setup screen Filter Times Filter Data screen Cartridge Data Status Codes screen Cartridge Data Averages screen Power Failures Data screen screen Interval Data screen Input Data screen Download Data screen Pace A 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 2 Title screen Partisol 2300 12 Channel Speciation Air Sampler Version 0 700 Date Nov 2 1999 Copyright 1999 Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc RDfault RData Reset Figure A 3 Main screen Stat OK Partisol 2300 Mode STOP 09 02 36 1999 11 04 Group Start BASIC Stop 1 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 3 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04
143. e described in Sections 11 and 12 and in the Partisol Model 2300 Service Manual Appendix A Overview of Partisol Model 2300 Sofware Screens This appendix contains the software menu tree of the Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler and all display screens of the software Appendix B Program Register Codes Allimportant system variables parameters and current results are stored in Program Register Codes These codes which are listed in this appendix are important when communicating with the sampler through its RS232 interface Appendix C Two Way Serial Communication This appendix describes the two way serial communication capabilities of the hardware Appendix D Installing New System Software This appendix explains how to download the unit s operating software into the Partisol Speciation Sampler Appendix E Cartridge Filter Log This appendix contains a cartridge filter log that can be used as a quality assurance tool to track the history of each cartridge and filter used in the sampler Pace 1 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 3 FLow SCHEMATIC The system flow schematic provides an overview of the unit s basic flow and electronic connections Figure 1 2 The schematic shows the air flow entering the ChemComb Speciation Sampling Cartridges where it first encounters a sharp cut PM 2 5 impactor that provides a PM 2 5 sample stream The air st
144. e ChemComb housing between the body housing and the top section of the ChemComb Figure 3 46 If desired you may place up to three more plastic filter screens with filters installed on top of this first filter Figure 3 47 Figure 3 46 Plastic filter screen installed on the body housing of a ChemComb cartridge Figure 3 47 Three plastic filter screens installed on the body of a ChemComb cartridge 7 Slide the top rim of the ChemComb housing down on top of the plastic filter screens Ensure that the top and middle pieces of the ChemComb cartridge are pushed completely together Latch both sides tightly 8 Place a small yellow cap on the hose connection port Figure 3 48 SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 33 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 48 Top rim filter pack outlet port of a ChemComb cartridge with small yellow protective cap 9 Document the relative humidity temperature date and time of the initial weighing 10 The zero reading of the microbalance should be verified be tween each filter weighing 3 7 Post CoLLecTION FILTER EQUILIBRATION Follow these steps to equilibrate the 47 mm filters after sampling 1 2 3 4 5 6 Unlatch both sides of the top rim of the ChemComb cartridge and separate the top rim from the main housing of the cartridge Figure 3 43 Remove the plastic filter scre
145. e Mode Options Group ChanLst SampSet Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Default Sample Repeat Time Default Filter Type The Default Sample Repeat Time parameter will allow you to pause the unit while it is running in the continuous operation mode offsetting the sample start time For example if you wanted the unit to sample for 24 hours every three days you would set this field to 72 hours The unit will then sample 24 hours wait 48 hours and then sample again for 24 hours If you don t want to offset the sample start time you would set this parameter equal to the Default Sample Duration For example ifyou wanted the unit to sample for 24 hours switch to the next cartridge or group of cartridges and then sample for another 24 hours you would set the Default Sample Repeat Time and the Default Sample Duration to 024 00 This parameter allows the user to identify the de fault filter type The default for this parameter is P EPA filter The user can select another alphabetic character by pressing lt List gt or lt List gt while in the Edit Mode to identify another filter type as the default filter NOTE When in the Edit Mode use the arrow keys lt T gt lt gt lt gt and lt gt to select the field that you want to edit After you have finished editing the fields press lt ENTER gt to save your changes SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 8
146. e PC refer to Section 10 2 1 for setting RS232 parameters Press lt ESC gt twice to return to the Main screen Connect the PC to the sampler with the 9 to 9 pin RS232 cable Section 10 Use any data transfer program such as Pro Comm Plus to transfer data from the sampler to the PC Check the sampling run status on the Main screen and note any status code other than OK Press lt F5 Data gt to enter the Filter Data Statistics screen Section 9 1 1 and view the filter data from the sampling run Record data from the Filter Data Statistics screen onto a sampling run log sheet if desired If there were any status codes other than OK check the Cartridge Data Status Codes screen to verify the validity of the sampling run While in the Filter Data Statistics screen press lt F1 MoreDat gt twice to reach the Cartridge Data Status Codes screen After checking the validity of the sampling run from this screen press lt ESC gt until you return to the Main screen Press lt F3 System gt from the Main screen to display the System Setup screen Press lt F1 I O gt then lt F1 RS232 gt to enter the RS232 Setup screen Press lt EDIT gt and set the Protocol field to Storage To save this change press lt ENTER gt Press lt ESC gt until you return to the Main screen Press lt F5 Data gt to display the Filter Data Statistics screen The record from the last sampling run is displayed in the upper right hand corne
147. e at which the sampler is currently programmed to end sample collection hh mm yy mm dd stop time and date by default Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen to enter the Sample Setup screen With the unit in the Stop Operating Mode the user can change the start and stop sample times and dates from this screen The number and letter displayed to the right of Channel identifies the flow channel currently used for sampling The number of channels dis played varies depending on the number of channels per group The screen will display only those chan nels that are part of the current group Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen and then lt F2 Group gt to enter the Group Setup screen With the unit in the Pace 5 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Stop Operating Mode the user can change the group and flow channel options from this screen Flow The value displayed to the right of Flow is the current flow rate for this flow channel Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen and then lt F3 ChanLst gt to enter the Cartridge List Setup screen With the unit in the Stop Operating Mode the user can change the flow rates for each sampling car tridge from this screen Vol The value displayed to the right of Vol is an automatic calculation of the volume of air drawn through this flow channel The volume calculation depends upon how long the sampler has run
148. e by squeezing the clip until it snaps together 20 Slide pipe B into the slot labeled B on the top of the unit Repeat steps 17 19 21 Slide pipe C into the slot labeled C on the top of the unit Repeat steps 17 19 22 Slide pipe D into the slot labeled D on the top of the unit Repeat steps 17 19 23 Attach the flow channel hoses to the hose barbs located on the back of the shelter box with flow channels A D Inside the shelter box the flow channels are labeled A D Figure 2 16 Match the labels on the white hoses to the proper flow channels and slide the hoses over the hose barbs on the back of the shelter box Figures 2 28 and 2 29 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 16 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 28 Match the labels on the white tubes with the flow channels inside the shelter boxes Figure 2 29 Flow channel A attached to the white hose labeled A 27 Slide the roof onto the top of the shelter legs Figure 2 30 Make sure that the roof supports slide inside the shelter legs and that the holes on the roof supports line up with the holes on the end of the shelter legs Figure 2 31 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 17 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 30 Slide the roof onto the shelter legs Figure 2 31 Make sure the roof supports slide in
149. e following procedures performed at the indicated intervals Leak check Perform a leak check after every 4 weeks of use Rainhoods Clean the air screens located under the sampler s rainhoods every 6 months or as necessary SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Pace 12 7 Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Batteries Check the voltage level of the batteries on the main computer board in the electronics compartment every 6 months see Service Manual Pump The pump in the Speciation Sampler has a lifetime of approximately 12 18 months If the pump s perfor mance deteriorates it should be rebuilt using the Partisol Pump Rebuild Kit 59 007837 two kits are required for each rebuild or replaced with a new pump R amp P part number 54 006528 0120 SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Pace 12 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 13 1 Title screen Section 13 Resetting the Sampler The Partisol Speciation Sampler s operating parameters can be easily reset to their default values This section reviews the different types of reset capabilities available to the user The Title screen Figure 13 1 provides the user access to the unit s reset functions also see Section 11 for a discussion of the Title screen With this screen displayed the user can press one of the soft function keys to implem
150. e of the denuder with Kimwipes moistened with Milli Q water Figures 3 34 and 3 35 SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 23 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 34 Moistening a Kimwipe with Milli Q water Figure 3 35 Wiping the outside of the denuder with Kimwipes moistened with Milli Q water SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 24 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 14 Attach the denuder to an open manifold port Figures 3 24 and 3 25 to dry the denuder While that denuder is drying coat another denuder by repeating steps 1 13 15 After you have finished coating the 4th denuder the first denuder that you coated should be dry However if you are coating de nuders with sodium carbonate it will take a longer period of time to dry each denuder 16 Remove the dry denuder and wipe its outer surface with Kimwipes moistened with Milli Q water Attach a clean dry red cap without any holes in it on one end of the denuder and attach a labeled red cap without any holes in it on the other end 17 Place the coated dry capped denuder in a clean tub that is cov ered with Kimwipes on the bottom 18 Repeat steps 1 to 16 to coat the remaining denuders 19 Turn off the air pumps after the last denuder has been removed and capped 20 Label the tray used to store the coated denuders wi
151. e sampler would display ZTP in the status condition field if a power outage occurred and if its pump compartment temperature was outside of the acceptable range The unit stores all status conditions that apply to each cartridge in the filter data storage buffer Section 10 1 8 2 OPERATING STATISTICS SCREENS The Partisol Speciation Sampler contains five screens that display operating statistics the Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen Flow Statistics screen User I O Statistics screen Wind Statistics screen and the System Statistics screen These can be accessed from the Main screen Figure 8 1 by pressing lt F2 Stats gt to enter the Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen From this screen you can access the Flow Statistics screen by pressing lt F2 Flow gt the User I O Statistics screen by pressing lt F3 User IO gt the Wind Statistics screen by pressing lt F4 Wind gt and the System Statistics screen by pressing lt F5 SysStat gt 8 2 1 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE STATISTICS SCREEN The Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen Figure 8 3 displays information on various current and average temperatures and the current and average pressure and relative humidity Press lt F2 Stats gt when in the Main screen or lt F1 TmpPres gt when in any of the other statistics screens to enter the Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION Pace 8 4 Revision A 000 Operating
152. e serial port is set up for basic communication functions using the German Ambient Network Protocol Appendix C The correct setting for the Protocol field is dependent upon the user s transfer software 10 2 2 Down oapinc DATA FROM THE SAMPLER Follow these steps to download data from the unit using commercially available data capture software 1 Go to the RS232 Setup screen Figure 10 3 and set the Protocol field to Storage or RealTime depending on how you want your data formatted To change the value of this field press lt EDIT gt and then press lt F2 List gt until the correct protocol appears in the field To save this change press lt ENTER gt 2 Attach the ends of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to the RS232 port of the Partisol Speciation Sampler and the RS232 connector of your PC to link the two devices Figure 10 4 3 Initiate your commercially available data capture software pro gram such as Hyper Terminal or Pro Comm Plus 4 Ensure that your data capture software program is set for the same communications parameters as the Partisol Plus Sampler The default settings of the unit is 9600 baud 8 bit word length 1 stop bit and no parity Refer to Appendix C if you suspect that the unit s parameters have been changed 5 Set the communications software into the appropriate mode such as the Data Capture mode or another similar downloading command 6 On the sampler define your data ou
153. e to the plastic hose connection insert Figure 4 4 Teflon tape applied to the threads of the plastic hose connection insert 3 Push the plastic hose connection insert out of the metal rim Figure 4 5 SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 4 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 4 5 Push the plastic hose connection insert out of the metal rim 4 Hold the hose connector and screw the plastic hose connection insert into the hose connector Figure 4 6 Figure 4 6 Be sure to hold the hose connector while turning the plastic hose connection insert 5 Continue turning the plastic hose connection insert into the hose connector until only 5 threads are visible between the base of the plastic hose connection insert and the hose connector Figure 4 7 SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 4 7 Ensure that 5 threads are visible between the plastic hose connection insert and the hose connec tor Hose connector Plastic hose connection insert 6 Push the plastic hose connection insert into the metal rim of the filter pack outlet port Reattach the filter pack outlet port to the Honeycomb system housing Figure 4 8 Figure 4 8 Reattach the filter pack outlet port to the Honeycomb system SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 4
154. e upper right hand corner of the Main screen Figure 7 1 and certain other screens Stat OK Partisol 2300 Mode STOP 09 02 36 1999 11 04 Group Start BASIC Stop 1 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 3 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 4 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 StCode Stats System Sample Data Press lt RUN STOP gt to switch between the non sampling Stop Operating Mode and the sampling program execution modes Wait Sampling Audit and Done In certain cases the user must select lt STOP gt after pressing lt RUN STOP gt to re enter the Stop Operating Mode The unit s operating modes are defined as follows Figure 7 2 Stop Mode In the Stop Operating Mode STOP the user defines the sampling program using the Sampling Setup screen and its sub screens Sections 7 3 1 7 3 5 Because this is the only non operational mode all user definable system parameters may be edited with the sampler in this mode NOTE It is zo necessary to return to the Stop Mode to exchange cartridges They can be exchanged while the device is sampling Pressing lt RUN STOP gt with the unit in the Stop Operating Mode causes the sampler to advance to the Wait or Sampling Operating Modes SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 1 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 2 Overview of operating modes Stop STOP Operating Mode
155. ec Temp 25 9 C Elec Heater OFF Pump Temp 21 6 C Pump Heater OFF Fan In Temp 21 4 C Pump Fani ON Pump Fan2 ON Pump1 ON Pump2 ON IO Wind TmpPres Flow User a System Setup seat 70K System Setup Mode STOP Average Temp 99 Standard Temp 99 Average Pres 999 Standard Pres 999 Date Form yy mm dd Average Time 30 Time Form Auto Run NO Curr Time 09 16 28 Curr Date 99 11 04 I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Browse Mode I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 4 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 11 System Setup I O screen Figure A 12 RS232 Setup screen Figure A 13 PRC Settings Warning Confirmation screen Stat OK System Setup Mode STOP Average Temp 99 Standard Temp 99 Average Pres 999 Standard Pres 999 Date Form yy mm dd Average Time 30 Time Form Auto Run NO Curr Time 09 16 37 Curr Date 99 11 04 RS232 RS485 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 RS485 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Stat OK RS232 Setup Mode STOP Protocol AK RS Paral 52 Baud Rate 9600 RS Para2 75048 Data Bits 8 RS Para3 13010 Parity None RS Para4 0 Stop Bits 1 RS Para5 0 Flow Ctrl None RS
156. eciation Sampler Figure A 25 Cartridge List Setup screen Figure A 26 Basic Sam pling Setup screen Revision A 000 Chan Group Type Cartridge ID Flow 1A 1 P 0000000 10 0 1 min 1B 1 P 0000001 10 0 l min TC 2 P 0000002 10 0 l min 1D 2 P 0000003 10 0 l min 2A 3 P 0000004 10 0 l min 2B 3 P 0000005 10 0 l min 2C 4 P 0000006 10 0 l min 2D 4 P 0000007 10 0 l min 3A 5 P 0000008 10 0 l min 3B 5 P 0000009 10 0 l min 3C 6 P 0000010 10 0 l min 3D 6 P 0000011 10 0 l min Copy Insert Delete Function Keys in Browse Mode Copy Insert Delete Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp Stat OK Basic Setup Mode STOP The current time Sample will start Start Date 99 11 04 is 09 50 99 11 04 at 11 24 99 11 04 Each sample will collect for 000 04 hrs Times Day NextDay Next Hr Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Day NextDay Next Hr Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler ar Filter Times Group Start Stop ale 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 3 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 4 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 5 11 40 99 11 04 11 44 99 11 04 6 11 44 99 11 04 11 48 99 11 04 Ta 11 48 99 11 04 11 52 99 11 04 Figure A 28 Time Sam pling Setu
157. el back the paper facing of the larger gasket and apply it to the larger rainhood 2 Place the large rainhood with its gasket attached on the right side of the enclosure Figure 2 5 eta 3 Secure the rainhood to the unit using four 4 10 32 x 1 2 slot bind head screws 2 2 3 INSTALLING THE SMALL RAINHOOD Follow these steps to install the small rainhood 1 Peel back the paper facing of the small gasket and apply it to the small rainhood SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 6 Partisol Speciation Sampler with a small rainhood installed on the back panel of the unit 2 Place the small rainhood with its gasket attached on the back of the enclosure Figure 2 6 3 Secure the rainhood to the unit using four 4 10 32 x 1 2 slot bind head screws ANEMOMETER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 2 2 4 INSTALLING THE CHEMCOMB SHELTER If you purchased a 4 channel Partisol Speciation Sampler follow the instructions in Section 2 2 4 1 to install your ChemComb Shelter If you purchased a 12 channel Partisol Speciation Sampler follow the instructions in Section 2 2 4 2 to set up your ChemComb Shelter 2 2 4 1 INSTALLING A 4 CHANNEL CHEMComB SHELTER Follow these steps to install the 4 channel ChemComb shelter 1 Check the ChemComb shelter assembly package for the following parts 4 shelter legs 1 hose assembly mounting plate
158. eld contains the address of the ChemSpec sampler for the purpose of RS485 communication Stat OK RS485 Setup Mode STOP Station 11 RS232 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 14 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 10 10 Contact Closure Setup screen 10 9 Locic LeveL Output The Partisol Speciation Sampler provides two user definable logic level outputs on the User I O connector on the front panel of the sampler Figure 10 4 with a voltage level of either 0 or 5 VDC The user defines the conditions in the Contact Closure Setup screen Figure 10 10 under which each of these channels reads 0 or 5 VDC This programmability provides the user with the ability to tailor the outputs to a variety of alarm conditions that may vary from site to site While in the Main screen press lt F3 System gt to reach the System Setup screen Figure 10 1 From the System Setup screen press lt F1 I O gt to display the System Setup I O screen Figure 10 2 From the System Setup I O screen press lt F5 Contact gt to display the Contact Closure Setup screen For each output channel defined in the Contact Closure Setup screen the unit performs an evaluation ofa program register code s PRC current value This test can include a bit wise oper
159. en exercis ing this command Pressing lt F5 Reset gt will erase all of the sampler s calibration constants Record all calibration con stants offsetand span from the samplers calibration screens Sensor Calibration Filter Calibration and Flow Calibration screens before pressing lt F5 Reset gt Pressing lt F5 Reset gt while in the Title screen Figure 13 1 causes the unit to reset a of its operating parameters to their default conditions This also clears the system s data storage buffers including the calibration constants After resetting the sampler calibration constants can be re entered in the appropriate calibration screen by pressing lt EDIT gt entering the offset and span where appli cable and pressing lt ENTER gt The sampler will require re calibration only if the calibration constants have not been re entered by the user SECTION 13 RESETTING THE SAMPLER Pace 13 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank SECTION 13 RESETTING THE SAMPLER Pace 13 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Section 14 Service Menu The Service menu provides the user with access to a large number of screens used for operational verification calibration diagnostic and informational purposes This menu is only available when the unit is in the Service Mode 14 1 ENTERING THE SERVICE Mope To enter the Serv
160. en s from the ChemComb cartridge Remove the 47 mm filter from the plastic filter screen and set it in its petri dish Examine the filter for defects that may have oc curred during sampling Place the petri dish cover under the bottom half of the dish Place a paper towel over the open petri dish during equilibration Record the filter number relative humidity temperature date and time at the beginning of this post collection equilibration SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 34 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 Equilibrate each filter for af east 24 hours under the following conditions The equilibration room must be held at a constant relative humidity between 30 and 40 with a variability of not more than 5 relative humidity The equilibration room must be held at a constant temperature between 20 C and 23 C with a variability of not more than 2 C 3 8 Post CoLLectiIoNn FILTER WEIGHING Follow these steps to weigh the 47 mm collection filters after sampling 1 Ensure that the filters have been equilibrated for at least 24 hours before weighing 2 Filters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of at least 1 ug 0 001 mg Ensure that the balance has been allowed to warm up before weighing the filters 3 Remove the filter from its petri dish 4 Weigh each filter at least once three times recommended re cording t
161. ent the desired type of reset The user should use these capabilities with care because information can be inadvertently lost if you select the incorrect reset key 13 1 RESETTING OPERATING PARAMETERS Pressing lt F1 RDfault gt while in the Title screen Figure 13 1 causes the sampler to reset most of its operating parameters to their default settings Refer to Appendix B for a list of the sampler s parameters and their corresponding program register codes PRCs and default values If you choose this selection it does zofclear the sampler s data storage or channel definitions Partisol 2300 12 Channel Speciation Air Sampler Version 0 700 Date Nov 2 1999 Copyright 1999 Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc RDfault RData Reset 13 2 SAMPLER DEFAULT SETTINGS The following list is an example of some of the sampler s default settings A complete description of all default settings is found in Appendix B Standard temperature 99 Standard pressure 999 Average temperature 99 Average pressure 999 Comm baud rate 9600 SECTION 13 RESETTING THE SAMPLER Pace 13 1 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Comm word length Comm stop bits Comm parity Comm flow control Comm protocol Current low password Current high password Current password protection Flow calibration reading points in flow calibration Flow calibration minimum Flow calibration maximum FTS pressure FTS
162. ent time and date and default time and date formats and to set up the sampler for remote RS232 operation Most of the parameters in this screen can be edited only in the sampler s Stop Operating Mode Section 7 1 Press lt F3 System gt when in the Main screen Figure 7 1 to enter the System Setup screen Figure 7 3 All of the fields in the System Setup screen can be edited when the sampler is in the Stop Operating Mode The following fields make up the System Setup screen Average Temp The Average Temperature C is used by the sampler to maintain the proper volumetric sample flow rate The de fault value of Average Temperature is 99 indicating that the unit should use the reading from the external temperature sensor to maintain a constant volumetric flow rate Standard Temp The Standard Temperature C is used by the sampler to report flow rate results in standard terms The default setting for Standard Temperature is 99 which may need to be changed to match conventions in different parts of the world The default setting for Standard Temperature does not have any effect on the volumetric flow rate and actual volume calculations by the unit Average Pres The Average Pressure mm Hg is used by the sampler to maintain the proper volumetric sample flow rate The de fault value of Average Pressure is 999 indicating that the unit should use the reading from the sampler s ambient pressure sensor to maintain
163. entation The seller further disclaims any responsibility for consequential damages Use of this product in any manner not intended by the manufacturer will void the safety protection provided by the equipment and may damage the equipment and subject the user to injury Pace Il Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Warranty U S Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing by authorized personnel of Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc R amp P and the purchaser the following warranty shall be in force for equipment sold and operated in the United States of America R amp P warrants that the R amp P supplied equipment shall be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of three hundred and sixty five 365 days after the date of shipment Subject to the conditions of this provision R amp P agrees to repair or replace free of charge any components of the equipment found to be defective in material or workmanship during the warranty period Purchaser shall notify R amp P of any detected defects and shall return any equipment believed to be defective to R amp P suitably insured and at the purchaser s expense In the event R amp P determines the equipment returned for warranty correction is not defective within the terms of the warranty purchaser shall be responsible for all costs of handling and return transpor tation R amp P s sole responsibility under the warranty shall be at R amp P s
164. er Figure 7 17 Advanced Sampling Setup screen Stat OK Current Time 10 16 99 11 04 Start Sample 11 24 99 11 04 Stop Sample 11 28 99 11 04 Cond Min Max Group 01 Mode STOP TEMP WNDSPD 20 00 5 00 0 00 25 00 40 00 0 00 Times Prev Next Reset More Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Prev Next Reset More Hour Day Back Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp The user can select up to three conditions that must be met for sampling to take place The unit will flow ambient air through the group of cartridges if the conditions are met and discontinue the flow if the conditions are not met without switching to the next group of cartridges during the programmed sampling duration The sampling times for each condition may overlap The Advanced Sampling Setup screen contains the following parameters Group Current Time Start Sample Stop Sample SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION The Group field identifies the group of cartridges that are in sampling position Pressing lt F3 Next gt will allow the user to program each group of cartridges with a unique Advanced sampling program The current time and date are displayed in this field The Start Sample parameter defines the time and date that the Partisol Speciation Sampler will begin sampling for the group number displayed in the Group field at the top of the screen When editing
165. er WNDDIR in the Advanced Sampling Setup screen to sample only when the wind direction ranges from 45 to 315 clockwise NE 45 W 270 E 90 SW 225 SE 135 S 180 Itis possible that a group of cartridges will not have ambient air flowing through them at all during their programmed sampling duration If the sampling conditions are not met during a programmed sampling duration and the cartridge s does not have any ambient air flowing through it the unit will still switch to the next group of cartridges at the programmed Stop Sample time Press lt F7 Reset gt in the Advanced Sampling Setup screen to reset the conditional sampling parameters to their off values for Condition and 0 for minimum and maximum values All other function keys in the Advanced Sampling Setup screen have the same function as those keys in the Time Sampling screen 7 3 5 Episopic SAMPLING SETUP SCREEN The Episodic Sampling Setup screen will display if EPISOD is selected as the Sample Definition Method in the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 The Episodic Sampling Setup screen Figure 7 20 provides access to additional conditional sample programming parameters The user can select up to three conditions that must be met for sampling to take place The unit will sample ifthe conditions are met and then stop sampling and switch to the next group of cartridges when those conditions
166. erature C recorded during the averaging storage interval This field contains the total sampling time within the averaging storage interval hhh mm by default during which the sampler drew a sample stream through its cartridge s Power outages result in this figure being smaller than anticipated This field contains the average ambient pressure mm Hg recorded during the averaging storage interval This field contains the average wind speed km h recorded during the averaging storage interval This value has meaning only if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the Partisol Speciation Sampler Pace 9 10 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA RH WVel All WDir Al2 AI3 Revision A 000 This field contains the average relative humidity recorded during the averaging storage interval This field contains the vector based average wind velocity km h recorded during the averaging stor age interval This value has meaning only if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the Partisol Speciation Sampler This field contains the average of analog input 1 engineering units recorded during the sampling period This field contains the vector based average wind direction degrees recorded during the averaging storage interval This value has meaning only if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the Partisol Speciation Sample
167. ered in the Sample Setup screen 7 3 3 Time 2 SAMPLING SETUP SCREEN The Time 2 Sampling Setup screen Figure 7 16 will display if TIME2 was selected as the Sample Definition Method in the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 Selecting this program allows the user to sample for two different scheduled intervals on the same sampling group of cartridges This feature will turn the sampling flow on at the beginning of the sample run stop sampling for the programmed period of time and resume sampling on the same group of cartridges for another programmed interval The Time 2 Sampling Setup screen contains the following fields to define the sampling program of the Partisol Speciation Sampler Group The Group field identifies the group of cartridges that are in sampling position Pressing lt F3 Next gt will allow the user to program each group of cartridges with a unique Time 2 sampling program Current Time The current time and date are displayed in this field SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 20 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 16 Time 2 Sampling Setup screen Stat OK Current Time Start Time 1 11 24 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 Group O1 Mode STOP 10 15 99 11 04 Stop Time 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 Times Prev Next Reset More Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Prev Next Reset More Hour Day Back Function Key
168. erent information depending on the sampler s operational mode When the sampler is in the Stop or Wait Operating Modes STOP or WAIT the Main screen will show scheduled operational parameters Figure 5 3 When the sampler is in the Sampling Operating Mode SAMP the Main screen will show current operational information Figure 5 4 Information common to both screens includes summary information regarding the sampling program currently defined by the user the current operating mode and the existence of any status conditions oor ee e Partisol 2300 Mode STOP 09 02 36 1999 11 04 Group Start BASIC Stop 1 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 3 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 4 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 StCode Stats System Sample Data SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler When in the STOP or WAIT mode the sampler displays the following fields on the Main screen Stat The value of the status code in the upper left hand comer of the Main screen to the right of Stat indicates whether the unit is operating properly A value of OK indicates that all functions are pro ceeding normally Mode The sampler displays the current operating mode in the upper right hand corner of the Main screen Press lt RUN STOP gt to switch between the Stop and Wait Operatin
169. ervice Menu screen with low level system information options Figure A 52 Service Menu screen with download system log option Figure A 53 Service Menu screen with exit service mode option Service Menu System Maintenance Routines Manual Motion Tests Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log Exit Service Mode A D D A Discrte TPIC RTC Service Menu System Maintenance Routines Manual Motion Tests Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log Exit Service Mode Service Menu System Maintenance Routines Manual Motion Tests Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log gt Exit Service Mode APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Revision A 000 Pace A 22 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 54 Audit screen Service Mode Figure A 55 System Check screen Service Mode Revision A 000 Stat OK Flow Audit Mode SVC Chnl SetPoint Current Actual FTS Pres 1A 0 0 0 10 0 00 0 000 Amb P 756 T 23 7 FTS Const m 0 0000 Vac P 000 FTS Const b 0 0000 Chan Chan LeakChk Audit Function Keys in Browse Mode Chan Chan LeakChk Audit Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Stat OK System Check Mode SVC Pump OFF Bank Flow A B C D PumpV OFF 1 OFF Set 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VacVt OFF 2 OFF LkChk OFF 3 OFF Cur
170. es 2 1 2 2 1 Installing the Relative Humidity Sensor c eee 2 2 2 2 2 Installing the Large Rainhood sarincccvencssnaneinatsSunasendceeuartes 2 4 2 2 3 Installing the Small Rainhood n 2 4 2 2 4 Installing the ChemComb Shelter cccccccseneceeeeeeeees 2 5 2 2 4 1 Installing a 4 Channel ChemComb Shelter 2 5 2 2 4 2 Installing a 12 Channel ChemComb Shelter 2 20 2 2 0 Installing the Ambient Temperature Sensor 2 36 2 3 Partisol Standarisasi einan a E E ENEN 2 38 2 4 Hardware Considerations s2 scssekesnerisocetiasdesetieteetoetaaas 2 40 2 5 Adjusting the Liquid Crystal Display LCD eeeee 2 40 SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION scccseseceeseesesueeees 3 1 3 1 Lab Equipment and Facilities 0 cccccecccccceeceeecceeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 3 1 3 2 ChemComb Cartridge Preparation cccccteceeeseecceineeeee 3 1 3 2 1 Clean Air Hood or Glove BOX ccccsssessecsneeeeeneeeeseees 3 1 3 2 2 Coating the Glass Wool ssisisirrcciirriiiiniiiscnsorisisss 3 4 3 2 3 ChemComb System Housing 2 csceciseticicvuscctnveteaiedincta 3 5 3 2 4 Teflon Coated Inlets sisisi 3 5 3 2 9 O Ring Preparation ssssssserrrressnrrrrnnneernnnnnnnseeeereeneneeeceee 3 6 3 2 6 Impactor Plates waisicisisvaisssassvaraneuviwiededvevadoonvivcenseccesavwoness 3 7 3 2 6 1 Cleaning New Impactor Plates Before Use 3 7 3 2 6 2 Cle
171. es Pressure System Setup Sample Setup Statistics screen screen screen Stats screen screen E E Flow Statistics User I O vina System Statistics Statistics screen Stats screen screen screen System Setup Site Password System Identification Information I O screen screen Setup screen OA w a a RS232 Setup RS485 Setup Analog Input Analog Output Contact Closure Setup screen screen Setup screen Setup screen Seregi RS232 Real Time Data screen Sample Group Setup Cartridge List Options screen screen Setup screen Specific Sampling Setup screen Filter Times screen Filter Data Interval Data Download screen screen Data screen Cartridge Data Status Codes screen Input Data screen Cartridge Data Averages screen Power Failures Data screen SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 5 6 The Partisol Speciation Sampler s display keypad Many screens allow the user to change the value of system parameters The lt EDIT gt key causes the sampler to leave the Browse Mode and enter the Edit Mode This interaction with the sampler is described in the following parts of this section Press lt ESC gt to exit the Edit Mode while in any screen Certain displays such as the Time Sampling Setup scree
172. ey comb system e Clean red caps size EC 32 two for each denuder e Clean dry sample vials for filter storage one for each filter e Glass petri dish e Kimwipes e Plastic squeeze bottle with Milli Q water e Filter forceps e Clean sharp razor blade or small stainless steel scissors e Tub to hold used parts SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 4 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 4 12 Placing clean red caps on both ends of the used denuders Follow these steps to disassemble the Honeycomb system IMPORTANT Do not disassemble the Honeycomb sys tem in room air NOTE Be sure to wear powder free vinyl PVC gloves at all times 1 Unclip the inlet port from the body housing Remove it and the impactor plate from the body housing 2 Tilt the body housing so that the glass spacer and the HDPE spacer slide out Place the glass spacer on a tray that is covered with Kimwipes Place the HDPE spacer in the tub 3 Slide the first denuder sodium carbonate coated out and imme diately cap both ends of the denuder with clean red caps Figure 4 12 4 Transfer the sodium carbonate label from the body housing to the red cap 5 Place the capped denuder on a tray that is covered with Kimwipes 6 Slide the second HDPE spacer out and place it in the tub 7 Slide the second denuder out Cap both ends with clean red caps 8 Transfer the appropriate label f
173. eys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign 11 1 PAssworpD PROTECTION The Password Setup screen Figure 11 2 is displayed by pressing lt F4 Passwd gt while in the System Setup screen The Partisol Speciation Sampler offers two levels of password protection to guard against unauthorized use of the unit Under normal conditions the unit operates with password protection turned off SECTION 11 PAssworRD PROTECTION Pace 11 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 11 2 Password Setup screen Stat OK Password Setup Mode STOP Cur Lo Psw Cur Hi Psw New Lo Psw New Hi Psw Confirm Lo Confirm Hi Function Keys in Browse Mode Function Keys in Edit Mode Bksp The two levels of password protection are defined as follows Low When in the low protection state the sampler prevents the user from entering the Edit Mode Execute the following keystrokes while in the Browse Mode to initiate or disable the low protection state lt ENTER gt lt ENTER gt LoPassword lt ENTER gt If the password protection is successfully invoked or revoked the unit will beep twice An L in the field farthest to the right of the soft function key line Figure 11 3 in the Main screen indicates that the unit is in the low protection state a ee AM Foo Partisol 2300 Mode STOP tion turned on 09 02 3
174. fines the configuration ofthe RS232 porton the front panel of the Partisol Speciation Sampler Figure 10 4 MAIN POWER 0 1 USER 1 0 CD RS485 RS232 jz cum ELECTRONICS COMPARTMENT HEATER STATUS Pace 10 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Depending upon the definition of the parameters in this screen the RS232 port can be used either for advanced two way serial communication AK Protocol or German Ambient Network Protocol or one way transmission from the instrument to another device The following parameters define the operation of the RS232 port NOTE For the fields described below press lt F 1 List gt or lt F2 List gt when in the Edit Mode to scroll through the list of choices Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Ctrl Protocol Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT This field contains the data transmission rate baud which may be set to 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 baud 9600 is the default This field contains the word length bits which may be either 5 6 7 or 8 bits 8 is the default This field contains the parity of data transmission which can be defined as None Even or Odd None is the default This field contains the number of stop bits for each charac ter transmitted ranging from to 2 1 is the default This field contains the type of communication flow control
175. g Modes Current Time Date The local time and date are displayed on the second line of the Main screen Press lt F3 System gt from the Main screen to enter the System Setup screen While in the System Setup screen input the local time and date before initiating a sampling program The Partisol Speciation Sampler expresses the cur rent time as hh mm ss and dates as yyyy mm dd by default Users may change these formats in the System Setup screen Group The numbers displayed below Group identify the group of cartridges used for sampling Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen and then to lt F2 Group gt to enter the Group Setup screen With the unit in the Stop Operating Mode the user can change the group and flow channel options from this screen Start The start times displayed below Start indicate the time and date at which the sampler is currently programmed to begin sample collection hh mm yy mm dd start time and date by default for the group of cartridges listed to the left Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen to enter the Sample Setup screen With the unit in the Stop Operating Mode the user can change the starting and ending sample times and dates from this screen SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 3 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler BASIC Stop Revision A 000 This value indicates the sample setup being used Thesample setup options are BASIC
176. hardware assembly SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 35 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 29 Remove the white leak plugs from the hose connections inside the shelter boxes Figure 2 67 Be sure to retain these leak plugs for use during leak check procedures Figure 2 67 Remove the white leak plugs from the hose connections inside the ee shelter boxes 2 A 2 2 5 INSTALLING THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Follow these steps to install the ambient temperature sensor 1 Locate the two screws on the left side of the enclosure 2 Remove the two screws Be sure to retain the washers This will expose two holes 3 Locate the ambient temperature probe assembly in the compila tion package Section 2 1 4 Secure the temperature probe assembly to the enclosure using the screws and washers previously removed Figure 2 68 IMPORTANT Place the washers between the ambient temperature bracket and the enclosure o under the head of the screw to keep water from leaking into the electronics compartment SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 36 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 68 Ambient temperature probe assem bly mounted on the enclosure 5 Plug the ambient temperature cable into the connector on the back panel of the sampler labeled Ambient Temperature Fig ure 2 69 Figure 2 69 Ambient
177. hat is on the flow channel which is being checked and to install a leak plug on that flow channel Figure 6 4 The flow channel that is being checked is identified under Chnl in the Audit screen Install a leak plug on the proper channel Figure 6 5 Figure oe meal baak PUG Stait yK Flow Audit Mode SVC screen Remove cartridge from Channel 2A and seal the inlet Press any key to continue _ 2 Figure 6 5 Leak plug a 7 installed on flow channel 2A SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION Pace 6 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 9 10 11 12 After you have installed a leak plug on the proper flow channel press any key on the keypad to begin the leak check The unit will automatically perform a leak check If a Pass message is dis played at the end of the leak check cycle press lt F2 Chan gt to switch the unit to the next flow channel If a Fail message is displayed refer to the Service Manual Re install a cartridge on the flow channel that passed the leak check Press lt F4 LeakChk gt to begin the leak check procedure on the next flow channel and follow the instructions on the unit s screen Repeat the leak check procedure for all of the flow chan nels Verify the sampler s flow Ensure that the unit is set on the flow channel that you want to verify Press lt F5 Audit gt and follow the instructions
178. he labels on the white hoses to the proper flow channels SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 33 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 62 Slide the hoses over the hose barbs on the back of the shelter boxes 25 Locate the ChemComb shelter box with flow channels 3A 3D Slide it onto the studs on the shelter legs on the right side of the enclosure Repeat steps 4 5 to secure the box to the shelter legs 26 Attach the flow channel hoses to the hose barbs located on the back of the shelter box with flow channels 3A 3D Match the labels on the white hoses to the proper flow channels and slide the hoses over the hose barbs on the back of the shelter box 27 Slide the roof onto the top of the shelter legs Figure 2 63 Make sure that the roof supports slide inside the shelter legs and that the holes on the roof supports line up with the holes on the ends of the shelter legs Figure 2 64 Figure 2 63 Slide the roof onto the top of the shelter legs SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 34 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 64 Make sure that the roof supports slide inside the shelter legs 28 Secure the roof to the shelter legs with four 4 10 32 x 3 8 screws Figures 2 65 and 2 66 The roof height is adjustable Figure 2 65 Secure the roof to the shelter legs Figure 2 66 Close up view of the roof
179. he transmission and response messages APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 10 German Network Protocol COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 56052053 ASCII codes for 3 digit instrument identifier for example 845 056 052 053 The instrument identifier must be 3 bytes in length RS Para 2 48048049 ASCII codes for 3 digit location ID for example 001 048 048 049 The location ID must be 3 bytes in length PRC of the variable to be transmitted by the instrument Up to 3 PRC s may be RS Para 3 122127133 designated for transmission by the instrument for example Flow 1 Amb Temp and Filt 1 Temp 122 127 133 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case RS Para 4 13010 lt CR gt and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the reponse Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended ASCII codes for 3 digit instrument identifier for example 845 056 052 053 PRC 2 is RS Para 5 WAS a ARA 0 this is used only if it is a non zero value ASCII codes for 3 digit instrument identifier for example 845 056 052 053 PRC 3 is RS Para 6 taat ane 0 this is used only if it is a non zero value Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument oe Tene swe p e e The DA command signifies a request for data from the instrument Response identifier to the DA command a Number of variables 3 digit instrument aS ae identifier as defined by RS Para 1 These three
180. he 47 mm filters used in the ChemComb cartridges 3 1 LAB EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES The following equipment and materials are required for ChemComb preparation and Honeycomb HC denuder cleaning coating and extraction e Ultra pure water system 18 megohm resistance e Acid gas ammonia and particle free clean air source e Clean air acid gas ammonia and particle free positive pressure hood or glove box e Lab balance sensitivity 0 1 mg xX Wear powder free vinyl e Calibrated automatic and dispensing pipettes PVC gloves at all times e Manifold e Routine lab glassware e Powder free vinyl PVC gloves e Coating solution e Milli Q water e Kimwipes e Silicon vacuum grease e Laboratory liquid detergent R amp P recommends that you use the Milli Q ultra pure water system manufactured by Millipore Corp or an equivalent system To minimize contamination you should coat extract and assemble denuders in a clean air positive pressure hood or in a clean air glove box R amp P strongly recommends that you use a clean air positive pressure hood NOTE It is important to wear the powder free gloves at all times Rinse the gloves with Milli Q water before extrac tion and dry the gloves by wiping them with Kimwipes SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 3 2 CHeEmMComB CARTRIDGE PREPARATION 3 2 1 CLEAN AiR Ho
181. he System Information screen displays the following configuration information Software Version The revision number and date mmm dd yyyy of the oper ating software loaded in the sampler Unit Serial Number The serial number of the Partisol Speciation Sampler The user may edit this field SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 15 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 12 System Information screen System Information Software Version 0 700 Nov 2 1999 Unit Serial Number 0 Interface Board Rev 1 System Type 3 MFC A Max 20 1 min MFC B Max 20 1 min MFC C Max 20 1 min MFC D Max 20 1 min Interface Board Rev This field contains the revision level of the interface board installed in the Partisol Speciation Sampler The system s software automatically detects the value of this parameter System Type This field contains the value of the system ID jumpers on the interface board installed in the Partisol Speciation Sampler The system s software automatically detects the value of this parameter MEC A D Max These fields contain the maximum flow rates of the flow controllers installed in each flow channel A D The value of this parameter is 20 for a 0 20 l min flow controller 7 3 SAMPLING PROGRAMS The Sample Definition Method selected in the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 provides a straightforward means of defining the sampling program
182. he following information Wind Speed Wind Velocity Wind Direction This field contains the current and latest averaged values of the wind speed km h This value only has meaning if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the sampler This field contains the latest vector based average of the wind velocity km h This value only has meaning if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the sampler This field contains the current and latest vector based aver aged values of the wind direction degrees as derived from an optional externally mounted wind vane anemometer This value only has a meaning if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the sampler Press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen from the Wind Statistics screen 8 2 5 System Statistics SCREEN The System Statistics screen Figure 8 7 provides a general overview of the sampler s operation Press lt F5 SysStat gt from any of the other statistics screens to display the System Statistics screen Stat OK System Stats Mode STOP Elec Temp 25 9 C Elec Heater OFF Pump Temp 21 6 C Pump Heater OFF Fan In Temp 21 4 C Pump Fanl ON Pump Fan2 ON Pump1 ON Pump2 ON TmpPres Flow User IO Wind Elec Temp SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION The System Statistics screen contains the following information This field contains the current temperature C of the sampler s electronics compa
183. he mass in grams Figure 3 49 The average mass reading is the final filter weight W g Figure 3 49 Placing a used 47 mm filter on a balance t 7 SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 35 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 5 Return the filter to its petri dish place the petri dish cover over it and store it for archival purposes 6 Document the relative humidity temperature date and time of the post collection weighing 7 The zero reading of the microbalance should be verified be tween each filter weighing 8 Determine the net mass filter loading DW using the following formula DW We W where DW the net mass filter loading W the final filter weight calculated in step 4 W the initial filter weight calculated in step 3 Section 3 6 Ensure that the figures used in this computation were obtained from the same filter and balance 3 9 ComPUTATION OF Mass CONCENTRATION Compute the average mass concentration MC of particulate matter during the sampling period using the following formula with the information previously as sembled DW x 10 MC Vv where DW the net change in the mass g of the 47 mm filter between the initial weighing and the post collection weigh ing as computed in Step 8 of Section 3 8 10 Conversion factor from grams g to micrograms ug V the volume drawn through the filter during the sampl
184. he sampler Figure 2 37 Figure 2 37 Securing the shelter leg to the unit 4 Slide the bank valve mounting plate onto the studs of the two rear legs on the sampler Figure 2 38 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 21 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 38 Bank valve mounting plate positioned on the shelter legs 5 Using the hardware provided one 1 1 4 20 nut for each support post secure the bank valve mounting plate to the legs Figure 2 39 Figure 2 39 Securing the bank valve mounting plate to the shelter legs SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 22 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 6 Locate the ChemComb shelter box with flow channels 1A 1D Slide it onto the studs on the two shelter legs on the left side of the enclosure Figures 2 40 and 2 41 Figure 2 40 Slide the shelter box with flow channels 1A 1D onto the studs on the left side of the enclosure Figure 2 41 Close up view of the shelter box resting on the studs SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 23 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 Using the hardware provided one 1 1 4 20 x 1 2 socket screw for each support post secure the top half of the shelter box onto the legs Figure 2 42 Make sure that the bottom holes in the box line up with the holes in the shelter legs Figure
185. hen the unit will not draw an air stream through those flow channels The Cartridge List Setup screen includes the following parameters Chan The numbers and letters 1A 1D 2A 2D and 3A 3D in this column identify the flow channels for each cartridge SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 28 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 22 Cartridge List Setup screen SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Chan Group Type Cartridge ID Flow 1A 1 P 0000000 10 0 1 min 1B 1 P 0000001 10 0 1 min 1C 2 P 0000002 10 0 l min 1D 2 P 0000003 10 0 l min 2A 3 P 0000004 10 0 l min 2B 3 P 0000005 10 0 l min 2C 4 P 0000006 10 0 l min 2D 4 P 0000007 10 0 l min 3A 5 P 0000008 10 0 l min 3B 5 P 0000009 10 0 l min 3C 6 P 0000010 10 0 l min 3D 6 P 0000011 10 0 l min Copy Insert Delete Function Keys in Browse Mode Copy Insert Delete Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp Group This parameter identifies the flow channel grouping for each cartridge You can change the flow channel grouping in the Group Setup screen Section 7 2 4 Type This parameter identifies the filter type such as P for an EPA supplied filter You can select another alphabetic character to identify different filter types The default para meter for this field is P Cartridge ID This parameter is used to enter each cartridge s serial num ber Pres
186. ice Mode 12 2 A 23 Basic Sampling Setup screen 7 17 A 11 Cartridge Data Averages screen 9 6 A 15 Cartridge Data Status Codes screen 9 5 A 15 Cartridge List Setup screen 7 28 A 11 Contact Closure Setup screen 10 15 A 8 A 15 DAC Channels screen Service Mode A 27 Discrete I O screen Service Mode A 28 Download Data screen 10 7 A 16 Download System Log screen Service Mode A 29 Episodic Sampling Setup screen 7 25 A 14 Filter Data screen 9 4 A 14 Filter Data Statistics screen 9 3 A 14 Filter Times screen 7 27 A 12 Flow Calibration screen Service Mode A 25 Flow Statistics screen 8 5 A 3 Flows Valves Pump screen Service Mode A 24 Group Setup screen 7 11 A 10 T O Calibration screen Service Mode A 26 Input Data screen 9 9 A 16 Interval Data screen 9 8 A 16 Main screen 5 2 A 2 Master Menu data storage options A 19 Master Menu sampling setup options A 19 INDEX Revision A 000 VII Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index continued Master Menu screen 12 1 Master Menu screen hierarchy A 17 Master Menu service menu options A 19 Master Menu status codes options 5 9 A 18 Master Menu system setup options A 18 Master Menu system status options A 18 Multiplexed Inputs screen Service Mode A 29 Password Setup screen 11 1 A 9 Power Failures screen 9 8 A 15 Real Time Clock screen Service Mode A 29 RS232 RealTime Data screen 10 5 A 6 RS232 Setup screen 10 2 A 5 RS485 Setup s
187. ice Mode press lt MENU gt on the display keypad when the sampler is in the Stop Operating Mode Section 7 This causes the Master Menu screen Figure 14 1 to be displayed Then use the arrow keys J and T to move the screen s selection indicator to the line labeled Service Mode With the pointer in this position press lt ENTER gt The unit then displays a Warning Confirmation screen that asks the user to confirm entry into the Service Mode Figure 14 2 Figure 14 1 Master Menu screen Master Menu gt Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage Service Mode StCode Figure 14 2 Master Menu screen with Service Mode option selected Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage gt Service Mode Master Menu SEcTION 14 Service MENU Pace 14 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 14 3 Service Menu screen SEcTION 14 Service MENU The unit displays SVC as the current operating mode in the top right hand corner of the Main screen Section 5 when in the Service Mode Refer to Section 7 for a description of the unit s operating modes Press lt MENU gt to display the Service Menu screen Figure 14 3 which provides complete access to the unit s audit calibration diagnostic and service capabilities Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of screens av
188. ient temperature and pressure sensors Sampled volumes are re ported in either volumetric or standard terms Flow rate set points can be defined by channel at a range of 5 to 18 l min 16 7 l min default Built in sensors for ambient temperature pressure and relative humidity The sampler contains five 0 5 VDC analog inputs with two dedicated to recording wind speed and direction Pace 1 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Three types of internal data storage modeled after the Partisol Plus Model 2025 Sequential Air Sampler Interval Data stored every 5 minutes contain averaged ambient temperature ambient pressure and sample flow rates Filter Data contain a set of values related to each speciation cartridge exposed including sampled volumes in standard or volumetric terms averaged meteorological data error condition flagging and power outage time stamps Input Data are stored at a user defined interval and include averages of meteorological data and inputs from external sources and operating information If an optional wind vane anemometer is connected to the sampler each input data record contains the average wind speed and vector based averages of wind velocity and direction The default averaging and storage inter val is 30 minutes Simplicity of operation performance audits and retrieval of stored data through an embedded micropr
189. ific sampling setup screen Section 7 that matches the sampling program you selected in the Sample Setup screen step 9 Check the values you have set for your sampling run s If these values are correct press lt ESC gt to return to the Sample Setup screen If the values are incorrect check the System Setup screen and the Sample Setup screen to correct these values 14 Press lt RUN STOP gt The sampler will enter the Wait Mode and then begin the sampling run at the programmed start time 6 2 POST SAMPLING VERIFICATION AND DATA RETRIEVAL This section explains how to verify the sampling run status and retrieve the sampling run data NOTE Data can be displayed on the screen or downloaded to a personal computer PC while in the Stop Mode Follow these steps to verify the sampling run status and retrieve the sampling run data 1 If the sampler has not been previously set up for data transfer to a PC check the RS232 setup in the RS232 Setup screen Section SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 2 3 4 5 6 7 SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION 10 2 1 Press lt F3 System gt from the Main screen to display the System Setup screen Section 7 2 1 Press lt F1 I O gt then lt F1 RS232 gt to enter the RS232 Setup screen Make sure that the parameter in the Protocol field is set correctly for the file transfer software installed in th
190. ight hand corner of the Main screen Press lt RUN STOP gt to switch between the Stop and Wait Operating Modes Pace 5 4 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Current Time Date Group BASIC Stop Channel SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Revision A 000 The local time and date are displayed on the second line of the Main screen Press lt F3 System gt from the Main screen to enter the System Setup screen While in the System Setup screen input the local time and date before initiating a sampling program The Partisol Speciation Sampler expresses time as hh mm and dates as yy mm dd by default Us ers may change these formats in the System Setup screen The number displayed to the right of Group iden tifies the group of cartridges currently used for sampling Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen and then to lt F2 Group gt to enter the Group Setup screen With the unit in the Stop Operating Mode the user can change the group and flow channel options from this screen This value indicates the sample setup being used Thesample setup options are BASIC TIME TIME2 EPISOD Episodic ADV Advanced and RS232 Press lt F4 Sample gt from the Main screen to enter the Sample Setup screen With the unit in the Stop Operating Mode the user can change the sample setup from this screen Section 7 The stop time displayed to the right of Stop indicates the time and dat
191. ill display when you press lt F4 SampSet gt from the Sample Setup screen The Filter Times screen Section 7 3 7 is accessible from all of the specific sampling setup screens 7 3 1 Basic SAMPLING SETUP SCREEN The Basic Sampling Setup screen Figure 7 14 will display if BASIC is selected as the Sample Definition Method in the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 The Basic sampling program is the most commonly used sampling program In this program the unit samples continuously for the same duration with each cartridge until there are no more cartridges available The Basic Sampling Setup screen uses the following fields to define the Basic sampling program of the Partisol Speciation Sampler Start Date The Start Date parameter determines the date yy mm dd by default on which sampling through the first cartridge sample will begin When editing this parameter treat each part of the date as a separate field The current time is The current time and date hh mm yy mm dd by default are displayed in this field SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 17 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 14 Basic Sam pling Setup screen Start Date Stat OK Basic Setup The current time is 09 50 Sample will start at 11 24 Each sample will collect for Mode STOP 99 11 04 99 11 04 99 11 04 000 04 hrs Times Day NextDay Next Hr Function Keys in Browse Mode
192. ing period as obtained from the sampler The sampler also indicates to the user which if any status conditions were encoun tered during sampling SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 36 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Section 4 Cartridge Handling and Exchange This section explains how to install a hose connector on the filter pack outlet port of the ChemComb cartridges This section also describes how to install and remove the Honeycomb denuders in the ChemComb cartridges and how to extract sampled gases from the denuders 3 1 Fitter Pack OutLet Port ASSEMBLY Before loading the denuders and filters into the ChemComb cartridges you must install a hose connector on the filter pack outlet port of each cartridge Follow these steps to install a hose connector 1 Locate the filter pack outlet port the top rim of the ChemComb cartridge Figure 4 1 Remove it from the Honeycomb system housing Figure 4 2 Figure 4 1 ChemComb cartridge with the filter pack outlet port highlighted Filter pack outlet port Figure 4 2 Filter pack outlet port removed from a cartridge SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 2 Apply a 1 3 4 inch section of Teflon tape to the threads of the plastic hose connection insert Figures 4 3 and 4 4 Figure 4 3 Applying Teflon tap
193. ion Tests Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log Exit Service Mode Audit SysChck 4 To enter the Audit screen while in the Service Menu screen press the down arrow J until gt System Maintenance Routines is selected Press lt F1 Audit gt to enter the Audit screen Figure 12 4 Figure 12 4 Audiksereen sate OK Flow Audit Mode SVC Chnl SetPoint Current Actual FTS Pres 1A 0 0 0 10 0 00 0 000 Amb P 756 T 23 7 FTS Const m 0 0000 Vac P 000 FTS Const b 0 0000 Chan Chan LeakChk Audit Function Keys in Browse Mode Chan Chan LeakChk Audit Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign SECTION 12 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Pace 12 2 Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 12 1 2 ENTERING THE SERVICE Mope War or SampLinG Moves Follow these steps to enter the Service Mode while in the Wait or Sampling modes 1 When the unit is in Wait or Sampling modes press lt RUN STOP gt to perform an audit The unit will display the Audit Confirmation screen Figure 12 5 Figure 12 5 Audit Confir a ecee ce Stat OK Partisol 2300 Mode WAIT Do you want to AUDIT or STOP Please choose Audit Stop Resume 2 While in the Audit Confirmation screen press lt F1 Audit gt The unit will display the Audit Directions screen Figure 12 6
194. ions Flash Memory The sampler detected an error in its flash memory This is a critical status condition causing the sampler to enter the Error or Wait Operating Mode Section 5 2 2 and the status lights to blink continuously Calibration A failure occurred in the sampler s automatic analog input calibration routine This is a cv7 ca status condition causing the sampler to enter the Error or Wait Operating Mode Section 5 2 2 and the status lights to blink continuously System Reset The system performed an unanticipated reset Power Failure A power outage occurred during sampling on the current filter Power outage events of less than 60 seconds are not logged by the sampler FA FD Flow 4 D Outof Range The measured sample flow rate s through the flow channel s deviated by 5 from its set point for more than 5 minutes SA SD low 4 D Stop The measured sample flow rate s through the flow TA channel s deviated by 10 from its set point for more than 1 minute Ambient Temperature The ambient temperature sensor was not installed correctly or indicated an invalid value For ambient tem perature this corresponds to a reading of less than 60 C or greater than 70 C Pace 8 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler VY A heater in the sampler s electronics and pump compartment ensures that the control zone stays within limits under cold tempera ture conditions
195. itric acid coated filter from its plastic screen and place it on top of the clean petri dish 23 Fold the filter place it inside a clean sample vial and cap the vial tightly 24 Transfer the appropriate label to the vial 25 Clean the forceps and the petri dish as directed in step 16 26 Place the remaining parts of the Honeycomb system in the tub to be cleaned SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 4 3 CHEMCoMB INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 4 3 1 INSTALLING CHEmComeB COLLARS Before you can install a ChemComb cartridge into the Partisol Speciation Sampler you must insert collars onto the cartridges Follow these steps to install collars onto the ChemComb cartridges 1 Locate a square ChemComb collar Figure 4 13 Figure 4 13 Collar for a ChemComb cartridge 2 Slide a collar onto the filter pack outlet port of a ChemComb cartridge top rim of the cartridge Figures 4 14 and 4 15 Figures 4 14 left and 4 15 right Sliding the collar onto the top rim filter pack outlet port of a ChemComb cartridge SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 10 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 3 Make sure that the top edge of the collare is approximately 0 38 inches below the metal edge of the top rim of the filter pack outlet port Figure 4 16 and that the hose connection is par
196. k to its value For example ifthe user would like to test for a filter temperature range 1 or 2 error H800 and H1000 PRC 5 the values of the contact closure parameters would be Variable 5 Program register code for StatCode Ap pendix B BitOp AND Use the bit wise AND operator to mask the variable BitVal 6144 The sum of status codes 2048 and 4096 R1 and R2 Comp Equal to CompVal 0 The value of the left hand side is equal to 0 if neither status code 2048 H800 nor 4096 H1000 is currently active In this case the TTL output level is 5 VDC if neither status condition is currently active and 0 VDC if either status code occurs Refer to the Service Manual for a definition of the pins in the User I O connector The value that is masked against the variable using the AND or OR operator Select OR as the BitOp and 0 as the BitVal if no masking is desired Pace 10 16 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Comp CompVal Section 10 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT The type of comparison performed between the result of the left hand operations and the constant entered at the right The comparison operator is defined as one of the following lt Less than lt Less than or equal to Equal to gt Greater than or equal to gt Greater than lt gt Not equal to The constant against which the result of the left hand operations are co
197. le Done Error Service The contents of bytes 23 and 24 indicate the existence Error pune 2 digit hexidecimal representation of current instrument operating mode see description at left lt space gt Space EE ae Toe representation of current instrument status condition see description at left lt space gt lt space gt Space ae lt space gt a Space 3 digit Location ID as defined by RS Para 2 3 digit PRC of the variable 8 sai transmitted zero included for informational filled from the left These CURRENT STATUS CONDITION Bytes 23 24 DENEA bytes are not defined in the German Protocol but are of any status conditions in the monitor No current status conditions Error Condition Exists Crit Err Critical Error Exists DEFINITION OF CRC BYTES CES The CRC information in bytes 38 and 39 is the hexidecimal representation of the exclusive or of all response bytes The high byte of the CRC is transmitted as byte 38 and the low byte is sent as byte 39 APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION purposes defined in the German ed Protocol and are reserved for future definition a ae Fee lt CRC gt lt CRC gt High byte and low byte of CRC The CRC s are replaced by a single lt CR gt 39 lt CRC gt lt CRC gt if transmit byte 8 was lt CR gt the end of the response lt LF gt lt LF gt transmission according to the entry for RS Para 4 lt space gt
198. le containing the download param eters 2300 BIN Model 2300 operating program to be downloaded 6 Using an ASCII text editor such as Windows Notepad review the contents of the self documenting RPLOAD CFG file Change the values of the listed download parameters if necessary to match the desired downloading operation COM 1 The communication port number If a non standard comm port is being used specify the correct port and IRQ values in the following lines PORT 3F8 This line is only used by the download program if the setting for COM above is 3 In this case enter the port address in hexidecimal of the comm port being used Otherwise the download program disregards the value entered for PORT IRQ 4 This line is only used by the download program if the setting for COM above is 3 In this case enter the interrupt request line of the comm port being used Otherwise the download program disregards the value entered for IRQ BAUD 9600 The baud rate of the program download This value must match the setting entered in the sampler s RS232 Setup screen Section 10 Permissible entries are 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 baud SETAK 1 Determines whether the sampler s RS232 mode changes to the AK Protocol after the download A value of 0 causes the instrument to remain in the None mode while a 1 instructs the sampler to enter the AK Protocol after the download 7 Download the instrument control softwa
199. length Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from instrument In this case lt CR gt and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended Not used Not used Not used Response from Instrument Question marks inserted in p unrecognized command Question marks inserted in p unrecognized command Question marks inserted in p unrecognized command Question marks inserted in place of unrecognized command a e eee YS YC a oo e e ee o o e e ee p e p ee pee Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 3 Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 3 APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler C 2 GERMAN AMBIENT NETWORK PROTOCOL The German Network Protocol as implemented in the Partisol Speciation Sampler provides basic capabilities to obtain the current values of one to three pre determined program register codes PRCs Due to the definition of this protocol it is not possible to select from a remote location which system variable Program Register Codes Appendix A is to be queried The following pages show the manner in which RS Para 1 through RS Para 6 are defined in the German Ambient Network Protocol and display the format of t
200. ling program allows the user to set a time interval for sequential sampling For example if the user selected 00 00 for Start Sample and 12 00 as End Sample times as shown in Figure 7 11 for Group 01 the sampler would start sampling at midnight and stop at noon You must program the Start Sample and End Sample times for each sampling group or the unit will sample according to the default settings that are entered in the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 The Time Sampling Setup screen contains the following fields to define the Time sampling program of the Partisol Speciation Sampler Group Current Time Start Sample The Group field identifies the group of cartridges that are in sampling position Pressing lt F3 Next gt will allow the user to program each group of cartridges with a unique start time and end time The current time and date are displayed in this field The Start Sample parameter defines the time and date that the Partisol Speciation Sampler will begin sampling for the group number displayed in the Group field at the top of the screen When editing treat each part of the time and date as a separate field Stat OK Group 01 Mode STOP Current Time 10 12 99 11 04 Start Sample 11 24 99 11 04 Stop Sample 11 28 99 11 04 Times Prev Next Reset More Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Prev Next Reset More Hour Day Back Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp
201. ling Operating Mode SAMP the sampler is currently in a user defined sampling interval Except in the case of Advanced or Episodic sampling with conditions the unit will draw a continuous air flow through the sample path when the proper sampling conditions are met The unit controls the sample stream at the volumetric flow rate specified by the user 10 l min by default Unless the sample flow rate deviates from its set point by 10 for more than 5 minutes the sampler remains in this mode until the stop sampling conditions are met Pressing lt RUN STOP gt when in the Sampling Operating Mode offers the user the choice of entering the Audit Operating Mode or the Stop Operating Mode Done Mode Once the stop sampling conditions are met the sampler will look for the next set of sampling conditions Ifno additional sampling conditions have been set for another cartridge or group of cartridges then the unit will switch to the Done Operating Mode otherwise the hardware returns to the Wait Operating Mode prior to initiating the next sample The sampler enters the Done Operating Mode DONE when there are no more sampling conditions to be met In other words when all sampling times dates and durations have been com pleted for all cartridges and groups of cartridges then the unit will enter the Done Operating Mode Pressing lt RUN STOP gt with the unit in this mode causes the sampler to return to the Stop Operating Mode The unit will
202. lt F1 SetPRC gt when in the RS232 Setup screen To input your required data time interval you would change the value of the Intv field in the RS232 RealTime Data screen This field will accept values ranging from 0 no data transmis sion to 3 600 seconds Each transmitted record is date and time stamped For example if you entered 10 in the Intv field during sampling the unit will output one line of data the actual data values are defined by the user in the Data 1 to Data 12 fields every 10 seconds This protocol allows only one way transmission from the unit to another device such as a PC To retrieve data from the unit in this protocol you must have a software program such as Hyper Terminal or Pro Comm Plus already installed on your PC that will capture the data Figure 10 5 RS232 Real i RS232 RealTime Data Intv 8 Time Data screen Data 1 None Data 7 None Data 2 None Data 8 None Data 3 None Data 9 None Data 4 None Data 10 None Data 5 None Data 11 None Data 6 None Data 12 None Function Keys in Browse Mode Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp SeEcTION 10 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Y Pressing lt F5 DwnLoad gt while in the Filter Data Interval Data or Input Data screen is a convenient way to download stored informa tion German Th
203. lt RUN STOP gt in Main screen Press lt RUN STOP gt in Main screen 4 Pause in Sampling Press lt RUN STOP gt when in the Sampling Mode to enter the Audit Mode The sampler will stop sampling When maintenance or verification is complete press lt RUN STOP gt to resume sampling Termination Conditions Done Operating Mode The sampler reaches the last sampling time Error Operating Mode The sampler encounters status conditions SA SD flow deviation errors during sampling Return to Stop Op Mode Press lt RUN STOP gt to return to the Stop Operating Mode NOTE If the sampler is in the Advanced Episodic or RS232 sampling modes it may stop sampling before the designated sample stop time enter the WAIT mode and then resume sampling with the same cartridge depending on the user programmed sampling conditions SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Wait Mode The Partisol Speciation Sampler resides in the Wait Operating Mode WAIT until the user defined sampling conditions are met for the next sampling run At that point the unit automati cally enters the Sampling Operating Mode and begins sample collection Pressing lt RUN STOP gt when in the Wait Operating Mode offers the user the choice of entering the Audit Operating Mode or the Stop Operating Mode Sampling Mode While in the Samp
204. lter box onto the legs Figure 2 17 Make sure that the bottom holes in the box line up with the holes in the shelter legs Figure 2 17 Securing the top of the shelter box to the leg studs 11 Secure the bottom half of the shelter box to the legs with two 2 1 4 20 x 1 2 socket screws and two 2 1 4 20 nuts Insert the screws in the two bottom holes of each side of the shelter box Figure 2 18 Figure 2 18 Insert the screws in the bottom holes of the shelter box SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 12 Secure the bottom half of the shelter box onto the legs Be sure to hold each screw with a screwdriver Figure 2 19 while turning the nuts with a nut driver Figure 2 20 Figure 2 19 Securing the bottom of the shelter box Figure 2 20 Holding the screw with a screwdriver while turning the nut SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 12 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 13 Locate the hose clip plate Slide the two studs on the back of the plate into the two holes in the hose assembly mounting plate on the back legs of the sampler Figure 2 21 Ensure that you mount the plate inside the hose assembly mounting plate so that the clips are directly above the top of the unit Figure 2 22 Figure 2 21 Slide the hose clip plate onto the two rear legs of the unit Figure 2 2
205. m the initial inspection and the equilibrium and weighing before and after sampling of the 47 mm filters used in the ChemComb cartridges Pace 1 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Section 4 Cartridge Handling and Exchange This section explains how to install and remove the Honeycomb denuders in the ChemComb cartridges and how to extract sampled gases from the denuders This section also describes how to install and remove the cartridges from the Partisol Speciation Sampler Section 5 Software Overview This section provides an overview of the hierarchy of the system s software screens and explains how to navigate around the software and change the values of param eters Section 6 Sampler Operation This section describes the steps involved in verifying the sampler s performance characteristics prior to starting a sampling run programming a sampling run and retrieving data after a sampling run Section 7 Software Setup and Operation This section describes the operation of the Partisol Speciation Sampler s software including the definition of its sampling program Section 8 Operating Information The Partisol Speciation Sampler displays a variety of information regarding the state of the system ranging from status codes to screens that display the current values of operating parameters This section describes the type of diagnostic information available
206. mal codes B 19 B 30 Honeycomb denuders 3 11 coating 3 14 gas extraction 3 24 installation 4 5 removal 4 7 hose connector 4 1 I ID numbers cartridges 7 29 site 7 15 impactor plates cleaning 3 7 grease 3 9 preparation 3 7 Revision A 000 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index continued inlets 3 5 input data 1 3 9 1 9 9 installation ChemComb shelter 2 1 software D 1 interval data 1 3 9 1 9 8 K keypad display 2 40 L lab equipment 3 1 leak check 6 6 12 7 lights status 8 1 line voltage IV List keys 5 11 log cartridge filter E 1 logic level output 8 7 10 12 10 15 M maintenance O ring 12 7 routine 12 7 mass concentration calculation 3 35 Master Menu screens 5 9 A 17 Master Menu data storage options A 19 Master Menu sampling setup options A 19 Master Menu service menu options 14 1 A 19 Master Menu status codes options A 18 Master Menu system setup options A 18 Master Menu system status options A 18 Milli Q water 3 1 modes 7 1 ADVANCED 7 21 Audit 7 4 12 4 BASIC 7 17 Browse 5 8 7 31 Done 7 3 Edit 7 31 EPISODIC 7 25 Error 7 4 Flow Error 7 9 RS232 7 27 Sampling 5 2 7 3 12 3 Service 6 4 12 1 12 3 14 1 Stop 5 2 6 1 6 4 7 1 12 1 switching 7 1 7 31 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler INDEX Index continued TIME 7 19 TIME 2 7 20 View Data 5 8 7 31 Wait 5 2 7 3 12 3 More key 5 8
207. mmand This allows the user to query the Partisol Speciation Sampler for the current value of any system variable Program Register Code Appendix B EREG Enter Register Command This allows the user to assign a new value to any system variable Great care must be exercised in using this command as the value of variables should be changed only when the monitor is in the appropriate operating mode SFxx Set Function xx Command This allows the user to send commands such as lt RUN STOP gt to the unit Each command is designated with a two digit code xx ASTO Ask Storage Command This allows the user to download a specified number of records from the internal data logger from the current position of the AK storage pointer The location of this storage pointer may be defined by the SSTO command The values on each line of output are delimited by commas SSTO Set Storage Command This allows the user to change the location of the AK storage pointer in the internal data logger and is used in conjunction with the ASTO command described above The AK storage pointer is always located just following the last record transmitted through the RS232 port via the AK Protocol Ifthe circular buffer overwrites this location or if the ASTO or SSTO commands have not been used the AK storage pointer resides at the oldest record in the internal data logger APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Mo
208. mpared to determine a value of true 0 VDC or false 5 VDC In Figure 9 9 the value of the left hand side is equal to 0 if neither status code 2048 H800 nor 4096 H1000 is currently active In this case the TTL output is 5 VDC otherwise it is 0 VDC Pace 10 17 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank Section 10 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 18 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 11 1 System Setup screen Section 11 Password Protection Access to program features of the Partisol Speciation Sampler can be restricted through the use of passwords This section describes how to access this feature Password protection is accessed from the System Setup screen The contents of this screen are reviewed in Section 7 2 1 while this section describes how to use the lt F5 Passwd gt function While in the System Setup screen Figure 11 1 press the lt F3 Passwd gt key to display the Password Setup screenThe user may redefine the low and high level passwords while in this screen Stat OK System Setup Mode STOP Average Temp 99 Standard Temp 99 Average Pres 999 Standard Pres 999 Date Form yy mm dd Average Time 30 Time Form Auto Run NO Curr Time 09 16 28 Curr Date 99 11 04 I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Browse Mode I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function K
209. mpler with AKComm software a 9 to 9 pin computer cable 07 000587 to enable the creation of data files containing stored information on a personal computer PC Alternately other commercially available software may be used to receive and store transferred information on a PC 10 2 1 RS232 Setup SCREEN Set up the sampler for downloading data in the System Setup screen Figure 10 1 Press lt F3 System gt from the Main screen to display the System Setup screen Press lt F1 I O gt to display the System Setup I O screen Figure 10 2 then lt F1 RS232 gt to enter the RS232 Setup screen Figure 10 3 Ensure that the parameters displayed in the RS232 Setup screen match the settings of your PC s RS232 port settings Edit these if necessary Pace 10 2 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 10 3 RS232 Setup screen Figure 10 4 Connector panel on front panel of Partisol Speciation Sampler 1 RS485 connector 2 RS232 connector 3 User I O connector Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Revision A 000 Stat OK RS232 Setup Mode STOP Protocol AK RS Paral 52 Baud Rate 9600 RS Para2 75048 Data Bits 8 RS Para3 13010 Parity None RS Para4 0 Stop Bits 1 RS Para5d 0 Flow Ctrl None RS Para 0 SetPRC RS485 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode SetPRC RS485 A I A O Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp The RS232 Setup screen de
210. mwipes placed on top of them NOTE If it is necessary to dry the inlets rapidly rinse them with methanol and allow them to dry on the Kimwipe covered tray or use the clean air system to dry them more rapidly SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION PAGE 3 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 9 left Side view of a PTFE coated 16 7 l min inlet Figure 3 10 right Side view of an annodized 16 7 l min inlet 3 2 5 O RING PREPARATION New O rings on the Honeycomb System Housing and teflon coated inlets require a thin coating of silicon vacuum grease Follow these steps to apply grease to the O rings 1 Clean the O rings with a moist Kimwipe if necessary 2 Place a small amount of grease on end of your index finger and rub it onto the O ring Use your thumb and index finger to spread the grease until it covers the entire surface of the O ring 3 Wipe the excess grease from your fingers and then use your cleaned fingers to rub any excess grease from the O rings 3 2 6 IMPACTOR PLATES 3 2 6 1 CLEANING New IMPACTOR PLATES BEFORE USE Follow these steps to clean new impactor plates before use 1 New impactor plates Figure 3 11 must be cleaned in an ultra sonic bath Use a 1 quart bath filled with tap distilled water that has a few drops of laboratory liquid detergent in it Use a spe cially made rack Figure 3 12 to support the plates in
211. n Figure 5 7 contain the lt F5 More gt key which indicates that additional options exist for this screen Pressing lt F5 More gt causes the additional extended menu options to appear on the bottom line of the display shown as a second line of options in Figure 5 7 To distinguish between the selections available from the main and second lines of the menu the function keys in the first line are designated by lt F1 gt to lt F5 gt in this manual s instructions while the second line contains the titles lt F6 gt to lt F10 gt Press lt F10 Back gt when in the second menu line to return to the main menu line SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 8 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 5 7 Time Sampling Setup screen Figure 5 8 Master Menu screen Revision A 000 Stat OK Group 01 Mode STOP Current Time 10 12 99 11 04 Start Sample 11 24 99 11 04 Stop Sample 11 28 99 11 04 Times Prev Next Reset More Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Prev Next Reset More Hour Day Back Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp 5 5 Master Menu The Master Menu provides another means of gaining access to other screens in the unit s software It can sometimes provide a more direct route to other program screens than navigating through the hierarchy of screens using regular soft function keys Press lt MENU gt to display the Master Menu scree
212. n Figure 5 8 This screen does not contain any fields that can be changed or edited Press the arrow keys lt J gt and lt T gt to view the soft function key options available for the categories listed Press the desired soft function key to make a selection or lt ENTER gt in the absence of any soft function key definitions Refer to Appendix A for the soft function key choices and the screens that you can access from the Master Menu screen Master Menu gt Status Codes System Status System Setup Sampling Setup Data Storage Service Mode StCode SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 5 9 System Setup screen Do zor select Service Mode from the Master Menu unless you need to access this operating mode Press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen from the Master Menu screen without making a selection 5 6 Epit Move The unit is normally in the Browse Mode which allows the user to move from screen to screen with ease In a number of screens however the user may want to change the unit s operating parameters In such a case the user must enter the Edit Mode Press lt EDIT gt to enter the Edit Mode from the Browse Mode If the current screen does not contain any fields that can be changed or edited in the current operating mode the unit displays a message to inform the user In such a case the user
213. n use a soapy brush 2 Follow steps 1 4 in Section 3 2 6 1 Cleaning New Impactor Plates Before Use During sonication grease used to catch large par ticulate matter may detach from the impactor plate This grease may contain particles that were collected during sampling This may cause a dark cloudiness in the sonication bath water 3 Following sonication rinse the impactor plates and then repeat the sonication treatment with detergent solution as many times as necessary until no more grease detaches from the plates during sonication 4 After the grease has been thoroughly removed from the impactor plates use repeated rinses and sonication baths with distilled water to completely remove the remaining detergent 5 Cover the impactor plates with Kimwipes and allow the impactor plates to dry in room air If you must dry the impactor plates rapidly rinse them with methanol 6 Store the clean impactor plates in a clean ziplocked bag 3 2 6 3 COATING THE IMPACTOR PLATES Follow these steps to coat the impactor plates with grease NOTE The impactor plates must be completely dry before they are coated with grease 1 Place the impactor plates on a clean flat surface with the indented circular reservoir facing upward Figure 3 11 2 Apply a small amount of Dow Corning high vacuum grease 59 006460 Figure 3 13 to the indented reservoir area of the impactor plate Figure 3 11 SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PR
214. ned as the beginning of the section when moving around the compass in a clockwise direction The maximum value is defined as the end of this section when moving around the compass in a clockwise direction NOTE The maximum value does not have to be larger than the minimum value For example if you want the unit to sample only when the wind direction ranges between 315 and 45 Figure 7 18 then you would set the minimum to 315 and the maximum to 45 even though the value 315 is greater than the value 45 If you were to set the minimum to 45 and the maximum to 315 the unit would sample only when the wind direction ranged between 45 and 315 Figure 7 19 Because 315 is the beginning of the desired range and 45 is the end of the desired range when moving around the compass in a clockwise direction the range is defined by a minimum value of 315 and a maximum value of 45 Wind direction is conventionally defined as blowing om a specific direction such as blowing from the South or East In Figure 7 18 if the wind was blowing from the North its compass reading would be 0 and if it was blowing from the South the compass reading would be 180 A clockwise NE 45 W 270 Bee S 180 SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 24 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 19 Setting the wind direction paramet
215. ng For example if you want the unit to download data every 10 seconds you would input 10 in the Intv field This field will accept values ranging from 0 no data transmission to 3 600 seconds Then select the program register codes PRCs Appendix B of the variables that you want to download and input them in the Data 1 through Data 12 fields To change the PRCs press lt EDIT gt and then lt F1 List gt and lt F2 List gt When you are finished entering the correct PRCs press lt ENTER gt to save your changes At this point the unit should automatically begin downloading to your PC For two way communication via modems an optional 9 to 25 pin modem cable 51 002814 is required to attach the sampler s 9 pin RS232 port to a modem s 25 pin connector Refer to the Service Manual for a listing of the pin assignments on the RS232 connector For further instructions on connecting the unit to a modem go to Appendix J 10 2 3 Downtoap Data SCREEN The Filter Data Statistics screen Filter Data screen Interval Data screen and the Input Data screen Section 9 contain the lt F5 DwnLoad gt key to download stored data through the sampler s RS232 port to another serial device Press lt F5 DwnLoad gt from the Filter Data Statistics screen Filter Data screen Interval Data screen or the Input Data screen to display the Download Data screen Figure 10 6 The lt F5 DwnLoad gt keystroke allows the user to downl
216. ng and should be transported to and from the sampling site in a capped ChemComb cartridge Use non serrated forceps to handle the 47 mm filters Inspect each filter visually for integrity before use Check for the following e Pinholes e Chaff or flashing Loose material e Discoloration e Non uniformity 3 5 PRE SAMPLING FILTER EQUILIBRATION Follow these steps to equilibrate the 47 mm filters before use Use petri dishes to store filters in the laboratory 1 Place a label on the cover of each petri dish and number each dish SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 30 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Y Record the initial filter weight as W Y The pre sampling weighing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period Figure 3 42 Positioning a 47 mm filter on a balance 2 Place the petri dish cover under the bottom half of the dish 3 Place each inspected filter into a separate petri dish 4 Record the filter number relative humidity temperature date and time at the beginning of equilibration 5 Equilibrate each filter for af east24 hours under the following conditions The equilibration room must be held at a constant relative humidity between 30 and 40 with a variability of not more than 5 The equilibration room must be held at a constant temperature between 20 C and 23 C with a variability of not more than 2 C
217. ng you to the Master Menu screen From the Master Menu screen press lt F3 Audit gt Once you have completed your leak check or cleaning procedures press lt RUN STOP gt to resume sampling Press lt ESC gt to display the Main screen Section 12 describes the maintenance and verification procedures in detail NOTE Fundamentally cartridges may be exchanged when the sampler is in any operating mode because the exchange procedure does not affect the sampling train But if the unit is about to switch to a new cartridge or group of cartridges to begin sampling or if it is performing advanced or episodic sampling it is advisable to enter the Audit Operating Mode when exchanging cartridges 7 2 System SETUP The unit s system setup screens set the global default sampling parameters for the numerous programming options available The System Setup screen defines whether SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler the sampler uses the default ambient temperature and pressure settings or standard temperature and pressure settings for maintaining and reporting flow rates in volumetric or standard terms The System Setup screen also can be used to set the sampler to the current local time and date 7 2 1 System Setup SCREEN The System Setup screen allows the user to define global parameters for the operation of the Partisol Speciation Sampler such as the curr
218. ntion to their place holders Similar to Example B 7 convert the hexadecimal numbers to decimal numbers and add them together Example B 8 converts to APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 27 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler At this point you should convert 23 into hexadecimal form by dividing it by 16 When you divide 16 into 23 you will find that 16 goes into 23 one time with remainder of 7 Therefore the hexadecimal equivalent of 23 is H 17 where H 17 1 16 7 23 converts to 10 13 23 B 3 6 Appinc Larce HEXxADECIMAL NUMBERS To add large hexadecimal numbers such as numbers that are 3 or more digits in length you can use simple linear addition Example B 9 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 28 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler E le B 9 i H 24B H 355 H First convert H B to decimal form H B 11 Next add 11 and 5 11 5 16 Now convert 16 to hexadecimal form 16 H 10 In the original equation place the zero under the right hand column of numbers and carry the over to the middle column 1 H 24B H 355 H 0 Now add 1 4 and 5 1 4 5 10 Now convert 10 to hexadecimal form 10 H A In the original equation place the A under the middle column H 24B H 355 H AO Now add 2 and 3 2 3 5 In the original equation place the 5 under the left hand column H 24B H 355
219. oad records from the current position or current record being displayed to the last record recorded by the unit Pressing lt F5 gt again prior to completing the download cancels the data transfer The Download Data screen provides information on the current position or current record being displayed and other available records Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 7 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler oar Pownload Download Data Storage Filter Rec First Record 11 09 1999 11 02 0 Current Pointer 11 09 1999 11 02 0 Last Record 17 52 1999 11 02 199 First Ptr Ptr Last DwnLoad Function Keys in Browse Mode First Ptr Ptr Last DwnLoad Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp The Data Download screen contains the following information Storage First Record Current Pointer Last Record This field contains the data type being downloaded Filter Data Interval Data or Input Data This field contains the time and date of the first record of stored data This field shows the time and date of the record at the position of the current pointer Data will be downloaded starting at this record number Press ing lt F2 Ptr gt or lt F3 Ptr gt will increment or decrement the current pointer record number Press ing lt F1 First gt will move the pointer to the first record number This field indicates the time and date of the last record of s
220. ocessor and menu driven software Software support for single and multiple point audit calibration of the sampler s four flow controllers using a volumetric flow meter Software support for the use of the Streamline FTS Flow Transfer Standard for flow audits and calibrations ChemComb cartridges are sheltered from direct solar radiation and passively ventilated with ambient temperature air in a protective shield Convenient exchange of sampling modules without opening the instru ment enclosure Remote operation through analog input or two way RS232 serial link Three 0 5 VDC analog inputs are converted to engineering units through user defined formulas These values are averaged and stored by the sampler Two additional 0 5 VDC inputs are dedicated to receiving wind speed and wind direction information The system performs vector based averaging of these meteorological inputs to determine average wind velocity and direction Pace 1 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION e Bidirectional RS232 communication allows current operating data interval data filter data and input data to be downloaded Standard equipment includes a 9 to 9 pin cable for linking the sampler to a personal computer PC and basic communication software e Three user defined 0 5 VDC analog outputs and two user defined TTL outputs provide simple access to system information by other devices e
221. on Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp 5 While in the System Check screen press lt F1 Start gt The unit will automatically do a system check When the system check has finished press lt ESC gt to return to the Service Menu screen While in the Service Menu screen ensure that gt System Mainte nance Routines is selected Press lt F1 Audit gt The unit then will display the Audit screen Figure 6 3 E Hi Stat OK Flow Audit Mode SVC Chnl SetPoint Current Actual FTS Pres 1A 0 0 0 10 0 00 0 000 Amb P 756 T 23 7 FTS Const m 0 0000 Vac P 000 FTS Const b 0 0000 Chan Chan LeakChk Audit Function Keys in Browse Mode Chan Chan LeakChk Audit Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION Pace 6 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 6 While in the Audit screen verify the sampler s ambient pressure by measuring the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg with an external measurement device Verify that the value for ambient pressure displayed in the Audit screen is within 10 mm Hg of the measured barometric pressure If this is not the case the sampler requires recalibration Refer to the Service Manual 7 Perform a leak check While in the Audit screen press lt F4 LeakChk gt to begin the leak check procedure 8 The unit will prompt you to remove the cartridge t
222. on the bottom line of the Analog Input Setup screen 19 63 ppb in this example The logic level outputs of 0 or 5 VDC are transmitted through the User I O connector on the front panel of the Partisol Speciation Sampler Figure 10 4 The two channels have the following pin assignments consult the Service Manual for a complete listing of connector definitions Channel 1 Logic Output Pin 11 Ground Pin 13 Channel 2 Logic Output Pin25 Ground Pin 24 Stat OK A I Setup Mode STOP Const A Const B Const C 1 0 0000 200 0000 0 0000 2 0 0000 200 0000 0 0000 3 0 0000 100 0000 0 0000 Calculated Values A I Mode SING 1 19 6294 2 8 7125 3 1 1384 RS232 RS485 A O Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 RS485 A O Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign 10 7 ANALOG VoLTAGE OuTPUT The User I O connector on the front panel of the Partisol Speciation Sampler Figure 10 4 provides the hardware connections to analog voltage output described below analog voltage input and to user defined logic level outputs described in Sections 10 3 and 10 6 While in the Main screen press lt F3 System gt to reach the System Setup screen Figure 10 1 From the System Setup screen press lt F1 I O gt to display the System Setup I O screen Figure 10 2 From the System Setup screen press lt F4 A O gt to reach the Analog Output screen Figure 10 8 Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 1
223. on to Instrument Response from Instrument Sie a sme ASCI code 002 code 002 soe ASCII code 002 Fe 1 digit Station Number RS Para 1 CH 1 digit Station Number RS Para a fask Storage command Enter the 4 digit Ask Storage command number of records to be downloaded from storage in bytes 11 to 13 below ERC ee E 2 digit Channel Number as defined Number of current status Ei RS Para 2 conditions storage This can be smaller than The number of records to be requested number due to end of downloaded from the instrument s file Storage marker moved to storage Downloading begins at 3 eT after last record transmitted Not the storage marker which can be rightfilled set using the SSTO command end of the response transmission SET CURRENT DATA STORAGE BUFFER OERE according to the entry for RS Para 3 1 in PRC 31 Interval Data 2 in PRC 31 Input Data The instrument then transmits the number of storage records shown in response bytes 10 to 12 above Each record is followed by lt CR gt lt LF gt APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 7 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler AK Protocol Set Storage Marker Command SSTO COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 52 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 2 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example K0 075 04
224. op or GLove Box To minimize contamination you should coat extract and assemble denuders in a clean air positive pressure hood or in a clean air glove box R amp P strongly recom mends that you use a clean air positive pressure hood Figures 3 1 and 3 2 show the dimensions and major components of the hood and the clean air drying system The purpose of each component is described as follows e Air blower Dayton model 4C443A to supply the clean air into the hood e Sodium carbonate coated glass wool to absorb acidic gases citric acid coated glass wool to remove ammonia and clean glass wool to remove particles e Baffle to evenly distribute air flow inside the hood e Flexible plastic film strips to minimize the amount of room air penetrat Figure 3 1 Schematic ing into the hood drawing of a clean air positive pressure hood Schematic Drawing of a Clean Air Positive Pressure Hood Lx Wx H 18 x 18 x 30 Baffle _ Plastic film Plastic film strips strips Clean Air Positive Pressure Hood side view Plenum Airblower ea Sodium carbonate coated glass wool Citric acid coated glass wool gt 9 Clean glass wool Clean Air Drying System Sodium carbonate coated glass wool Citric acid coated glass wool Particle filter kar e Manifold Clean Air Positive Pressure Hood back view SEc
225. op view of cartridges for a 4 channel unit with flow channels and groups highlighted TE Group 1 Group 2 SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 14 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 2 6 Site IDENTIFICATION SCREEN The Site Identification screen Figure 7 11 has two 32 character fields The user can enter site identification numbers or letters using one or both fields Ifno entry is made in these fields then the site identification field will appear in the sampler s data output from this screen as a blank field with quotation marks surrounding it y While in the Main screen Figure 7 1 press lt F3 System gt which takes you to the System Setup screen Figure 7 3 In the System Setup screen press lt F2 Site ID gt to display the Site Identification screen Sa 7 11 Site Identifica otat OK Site Identification ion screen Idi Id2 Function Keys in Browse Mode Function Keys in Edit Mode Bksp A lt A gt 7 2 7 SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN The only field that can be edited in the System Information screen Figure 7 12 is the sampler serial number field While in the Main screen Figure 7 1 press lt F3 System gt to enter the System Setup screen Figure 7 3 In the System Setup screen press lt F4 SysInfo gt to display the System Information screen T
226. or more detailed information on navigating through the sampler s software screens Follow these steps to program the sampler for a sampling run 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION Install the desired number of ChemComb cartridges in the ChemComb shelter Sections 3 and 4 Ensure that your sampler is in the Stop Mode Do a system check and a leak check and verify the flow rates for each flow channel on your unit Section 6 3 While in the Main screen Section 5 press lt F1 StCodes gt to display the Status Codes screen Section 8 While in the Status Codes screen ensure that there are no status codes reported and the present status of the unit is OK Then press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen While in the Main screen press lt F2 Stats gt to display the Tem perature and Pressure Statistics screen Section 8 While in the Temperature and Pressure Statistics screen ensure that the current ambient temperature pressure and relative humidity values are correct Then press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen While in the Main screen press lt F3 Setup gt to display the Sys tem Setup screen Section 7 While in the System Setup screen press lt EDIT gt Enter the cur rent date and time Section 7 2 1 and then press lt ENTER gt to save these changes Then press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen While in the Main screen press lt F4
227. ow channels Twelve groups of flow channels Pace 1 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Four flow channels can be operated simultaneously each at a flow rate of up to 16 7 l min 1 m h to achieve thermodynamic conditions comparable with PM 2 5 FRM samplers This also allows more material to be collected on each 47 mm filter for analysis than at lower flow rates Flexible definition of sampling programs by time date or external inputs such as wind speed and or direction or analog input from another external source ADVANCED FEATURES ChemComb Speciation Sampling Cartridges contain the following features A sharp cut PM 2 5 impactor that operates at 10 or 16 7 l min and achieves a PM 2 5 cut point similar to that of the U S Environmental Protection Agency EPA WINS impactor Up to two high efficiency honeycomb denuders patented field tested and characterized by Harvard University A four stage filter pack for 47 mm diameter filters A straight flow path followed by the sample stream between the PM 2 5 impactor and the four stage filter pack The hardware components are housed in a sealable module that elimi nates the in field assembly of sampling components Other major features include the following Active volumetric flow control maintains a constant volumetric flow rate specified by the user by incorporating four mass flow controllers and amb
228. p sorsan Stat OK Group 01 Mode STOP Current Time 10 12 99 11 04 Start Sample 11 24 99 11 04 Stop Sample 11 28 99 11 04 Times Prev Next Reset More Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Prev Next Reset More Hour Day Back Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 12 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Revision A 000 Figure A 29 Time 2 Sampling Setup screen Stat OK Group 01 Mode STOP Current Time 10 15 99 11 04 Start Time Stop Time 1 11 24 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 Times Prev Next Reset More Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Prev Next Reset More Hour Day Back Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp Figure A 30 Advanced Stat OK Group 01 Mode STOP Sampling Setup screen Current Time Start Sample Stop Sample Cond TEMP Min 20 00 10 11 24 11 28 WNDSPD 5 00 16 99 11 04 99 11 04 99 11 04 Max 25 00 40 00 0 00 Times Prev Next Reset More Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Prev Next Reset More Hour Day Back Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 13 Revision A 000 Ope
229. peatedly to view its subsidiary screens in the following order Filter Data screen Cartridge Data Status Codes screen Cartridge Data Averages screen Power Failures screen Stat OK Partisol 2300 Mode STOP 09 02 36 1999 11 04 Group Start BASIC Stop 1 11 24 99 11 04 11 28 99 11 04 2 11 28 99 11 04 11 32 99 11 04 3 11 32 99 11 04 11 36 99 11 04 4 11 36 99 11 04 11 40 99 11 04 StCode Stats System Sample Data To switch among filter data interval data and input data press lt F4 gt repeatedly from the Filter Data Statistics screen With the exception of the subsidiary filter data screens the sampler displays the last database record when the user enters these screens The fields in these screens can not be edited To navigate among records of stored information press lt Fl Rec gt to move backward and lt F2 Rec gt to move forward when in any of the filter data screens the Interval Data screen and the Input Data screen Holding down these keys repeats and accelerates these actions The current record number is in the upper right hand corner SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA PAGE 9 2 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Revision A 000 9 1 1 Firter Data Statistics SCREEN Press lt F5 Data gt when in the Main screen Figure 9 1 to enter the Filter Data Statistics screen Figure 9 2 The sampler displays the following filter data fields in this screen Stat Rec
230. perating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Actual Sample Stop Valid Elapsed Time Total Elapsed Time Revision A 000 This field indicates the actua ending time date hh mm yyyy mm dd by default at which the system stopped sampling The Valid Elapsed Time field shows the elapsed sampling time hhh mm by default during which the sampler operated normally i e without any status conditions The Total Elapsed Time field shows the total sam pling time hhh mm by default during which the sampler drew a sample stream through its filter Power outages will cause this figure to be smaller than the programmed sample duration time Press lt F3 MoreDat gt to display the Filter Data screen Press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen 9 1 2 Fitter Data SCREEN The Filter Data screen Figure 9 3 provides information on the flow channel Cartridge ID and Site ID numbers to identify the filter s and the cartridge used for the displayed record number and to identify the site where the sampler is located Other data included on this screen are the flow volume and the percent coefficient of variation The sampler displays the following filter and cartridge data fields in this screen Stat The Stat field in the upper left hand corner of the screen shows the status conditions encountered during sampling pote SS iter Pale Stat OK Filter Data Rec 199 screen Channel 1B Cartridge ID 0000001 Type P
231. presents the place holder occupied by the letter B 11 16 2 816 Now add 8 192 and 2 816 8 192 2 816 11 008 Next multiply 4 by 16 I6 represents the place holder occupied by the number 4 4 16 64 Now add 11 008 and 64 11 008 64 11 072 Next convert H A to decimal form H A 10 Add 10 and 16 10 represents the place holder occupied by the letter A 10 16 10 Now add 11 072 and 10 11 072 10 11 082 Therefore H 2B4A 11 082 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 25 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Example 5 can also be expressed in the following form Example 6 Example B 6 H 2B4A 16 1 10 10 H A 10 16 16 1 4 64 16 16 16 11 2 816 H B 11 16 16 16 16 2 8 192 10 64 2 816 8 192 11 082 Therefore H 2B4A 11 082 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 26 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Example B 7 Example B 8 B 3 5 AppiING SMALL HEXxADECIMAL NUMBERS To add small hexadecimal numbers simply convert them to decimal numbers and add them together When you find the decimal sum convert it into a hexadecimal number Example B 7 converts to When you convert the decimal sum 9 into a hexadecimal number you have H 9 Figure B 1 converts to To add hexadecimal numbers with sums larger than 9 you will need to pay atte
232. r This field contains the average of analog input 2 engineering units recorded during the sampling period This field contains the average of analog input 3 engineering units recorded during the sampling period Pace 9 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 9 12 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Section 10 Data Input and Output The Partisol Speciation Sampler provides various capabilities for transmitting data to other devices in digital and analog form It can also receive information in the form of analog voltages from other hardware allowing the user to convert these inputs to engineering units This section describes how to access these features Data input and output is accessed from the System Setup screen Figure 10 1 The contents of the System Setup screen are reviewed in Section 7 2 1 This section describes how to access and use the lt F1 I O gt function from the System Setup screen Figure 10 1 System Setup stat OK ee System Setup Mode STOP Average Temp 99 Standard Temp 99 Average Pres 999 Standard Pres 999 Date Form yy mm dd Average Time 30 Time Form Auto Run NO Curr Time 09 16 28 Curr Date 99 11 04 I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Browse Mode I O Site ID Passwd SysInfo Function Keys in Edit Mod
233. r of the Filter Data Statistics screen Press lt F5 DwnLoad gt to display the Download Data screen Section 10 2 3 Scroll to the Last Record field and use the lt F4 Last gt key to select the ast data record Scroll to the First Record field and use the lt F1 First gt to select the rst data record Press the lt F2 Ptr gt or lt F3 Ptr gt key to select the first data record you want to download Once the PC communications software is ready to receive the records press lt F5 DwnLoad gt while in the Download Data screen The sampler will download all data from the currently displayed record to the last record in the data file If you need to download output for interval data status codes or any of the Pace 6 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 6 1 Service Menu screen with system mainte nance routines options other screens accessed from the Filter Data screen display the screen and repeat the download process 8 If any status code conditions occurred press lt ESC gt to return to the Main screen From the Main screen press lt F1 StCode gt to reach the Status Codes screen Press lt F1 Reset gt to reset the unit s status condition for the next run to OK 6 3 SAMPLING VERIFICATION R amp P recommends that the tests described below be performed before initiating your first sample run These tests should also be performed afer every four weeks of ro
234. r period of time before using them for sampling Figure 3 19 Flushing the HC with distilled water SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 13 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 2 After flushing rinse the HCs with the Milli Q water at least three times to make sure that every tube of the HC has been rinsed Figure 3 20 Figure 3 20 Rinsing the honeycomb denuders with Milli Q water 3 After rinsing gently tap the HC denuders on the clean Kimwipes to shake all of the water out of the denuder tubes 4 Place all of the cleaned denuders on a clean plastic tray that has been covered with Kimwipes Place additional Kimwipes on the top of the HCs allowing them to dry in room air NOTE If it is necessary to dry the denuders rapidly rinse them with methanol and allow them to dry on the Kimwipe covered tray or use the clean air system to dry them more rapidly 5 After the HCs are dry cap both ends of each HC with clean red caps polyethylene caps size EC 32 CAPLUGS Division Protec tive Closures Inc Figures 3 21 and 3 22 and store them in labeled tubs prior to coating If you will be using citric acid coat ings you must soak the denuders in 1 N hydrochloric acid for several hours to reduce background sodium and ammonia ions Rinse the acid off the denuders using the procedures described above SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION
235. rating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 31 Episodic Sampling Setup screen Stat OK Episodic Setup Mode STOP Current Time 10 24 99 11 04 Start Event Capture 11 24 99 11 04 Stop Event Capture 11 28 99 11 04 Cond TEMP RH Min 10 00 80 00 Max 40 00 95 00 Hour Day Reset Function Keys in Browse Mode Times Times Hour Day Reset Function Keys in Edit Mode Bksp List List Figure A 32 Filter Data Statisti Stat OK Filter Times tatistics screen Set Sample Start 17 52 Set Sample Stop 17 56 Actual Sample Start 17 52 Actual Sample Stop 17 52 Valid Elapsed Time 000 00 Total Elapsed Time 000 00 Rec 199 1999 11 02 1999 11 02 1999 11 02 1999 11 02 Figure A 33 Filter Data screen Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat DwnLoad Stat OK ID1 ID2 Filter Data Channel Cartridge ID Volume SCV 1B 0000001 0 0 0 0 Re Type 1 c 199 P Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat DwnLoad APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 14 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 34 Cartridge Data Status Codes screen Figure A 35 Cartridge Data Averages screen Figure A 36 Power Failures screen Status Codes Reo 199 OK No Status Conditions Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDa
236. rating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 4 22 Manually securing the hose connec tion NOTE When you first begin using your ChemComb cartridges you may need to manually secure the hose connection After a number of uses the cartridge outlet port will fit securly into its hose connection when it is slid onto the tray and will not require manual securing 4 Repeat steps 2 3 to install the desired number of cartridges 5 Close the shelter door and latch it 4 3 3 Removinc CHeEmCome CARTRIDGES Follow these steps to remove a ChemComb cartridge from the Partisol Speciation Sampler 1 Open the ChemComb shelter door 2 Slide the ChemComb cartridge out of the tray The hose connec tion should disconnect easily 3 Close the shelter door and latch it SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 14 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Y Ensure that all applicable safety standards are met before applying power to the unit Figure 5 1 Power switch on the sampler Section 5 Software Overview This section describes the steps involved in turning the Partisol Speciation Sampler on and off navigating through its basic screens and interacting with the unit 5 1 TURNING ON THE PARTISOL SPECIATION SAMPLER Follow the procedures outlined in Sections 2 3 and 4 before attempting to operate the Partisol Speciation Sampler Once the sampling system has been
237. rating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler NOTE It is important to wear the powder free gloves at all times Rinse the gloves with Milli Q water before coating and dry the gloves by wiping them with Kimwipes R amp P suggests that two people work together when following these procedures to reduce exposure of the denuders to room air and to preserve the capacity of the clean air system Follow these steps to coat and dry the Honeycomb denuders 1 Before beginning the coating and drying procedure place pow der free gloves on your hands Once you are wearing the gloves rinse your gloved hands with Milli Q water and dry the gloves by wiping them with Kimwipes Figure 3 26 Figure 3 26 Rinse your gloved hands with Milli Q water and dry the gloves by wiping them with Kimwipes 2 Remove the labeled red end cap from a clean dry denuder and place the denuder on a clean tray Be sure to leave the other red cap on the end of the denuder 3 Use the dispensing pipette bottle and gently add 10 ml of coating solution to the open end of the denuder Figure 3 27 SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 18 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 27 Use the dispensing bottle to add coating solution to the open end of the denuder 4 Cap the open end of the denuder with a clean red cap that has a hole in it Figure 3 28 Figure 3 28 Covering the open
238. ration levels are a good indicator of testing your denuder cleaning skills SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 29 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler X Do not touch filters with your fingers Use non serrated forceps to handle the filters If you feel a headache during or after coating this means you may have been exposed to a high level of methanol Use a fan to supply fresh air outside the hood Do not use a strong fan because this strong flow might push room air into the clean air hood and contaminate the denuders If your red caps leak during coating it might be due to a The end cap is too tight b You did not use an end cap that has hole in it c You held the denuder too tightly This can generate some pressure that will push the solution out of the denuder If the red caps leak during coating just wipe the denuder with Kimwipes moistened with Milli Q water Also replace the Kimwipes covering the bottom of the hood If some of the sample is lost during extraction this could result in an error in concentration measurement 3 4 FittTER HANDLING AND INITIAL INSPECTION You may use various types of 47 mm diameter filters to sample particulate matter that passes through the ChemComb cartridges Ensure that your filters are clean and do not touch them with your fingers Filters should be stored at the laboratory in petri dishes or some other protective housi
239. re according to the pa rameters in RPLOAD CFG by issuing the following command from the PC RPLOAD 2300 BIN APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SYSTEM SOFTWARE Pace D 2 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler As the software executes it indicates and updates the current stage of the software transmission 8 Perform a complete reset of your unit Pressing lt F5 Reset gt Figure D 1 while in the Title screen causes the unit to reset a of its operating parameters to their default conditions This also clears the system s data storage buffers including the calibration constants 9 Re enter your required operating parameters and the calibration constants that you recorded before loading the new software Calibration constants can be reentered in the appropriate calibra tion screens by pressing lt EDIT gt entering the offset and span where applicable and pressing lt ENTER gt 10 If performing a direct program download disconnect the 9 to 9 pin computer cable from the unit to the PC Figure D 1 Title screen Partisol 2300 12 Channel Speciation Air Sampler Version 0 700 Date Nov 2 1999 Copyright 1999 Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc RDfault RData Reset APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SYSTEM SOFTWARE Pace D 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SY
240. ream then continues through either one or two honeycomb denuders and a four stage 47 mm filter pack The user may choose to remove the honeycomb denuders and sample using only the filter packs The 12 channel Partisol Speciation Sampler allows up to four sampling trains to be active at once All four channels may be set to operate concurrently at up to 16 7 l min 1 m h Channels can be programmed in groups of 4 3 2 or 1 to fulfill specific applications The denuders and filters remain inside the ChemComb cartridges during transport for removal in the lab This simplifies denuder and filter exchange and transport and minimizes the risk of contamination during these procedures The mass flow controllers operate under the control of the sampler s microprocessor and maintain the sample streams at a constant vo wmezr7c flow rate through the use of ambient temperature and pressure sensors The Partisol Speciation Sampler maintains three constant volumetric flow rates at the set points entered by the user 16 7 l min 10 l min and 10 l min defaults and reports sampled volumes m in volumetric or standard terms The sampling system determines the ambient temperature and pressure for flow rate calculations through the use of sensors that provide continually updated information to the microprocessor system The mass flow controllers in the Partisol Speciation Sampler are calibrated at a temperature of 0 C and pressure of 1 Atmosphere 1013
241. riod hh mm 5 Minute Average Ambient Temperature C 5 Minute Average Ambient Pressure mm Hg 5 Minute Average Flow A volumetric l min 5 Minute Average Flow B volumetric l min 5 Minute Average Flow C volumetric l min 5 Minute Average Flow D volumetric l min 10 5 Format oF Input Data RECORDS Each record of input data contains the comma delimited data fields shown below Records are separated from each other by the carriage return ASCII 013 and line feed ASCII 010 characters Each input data record contains Storage Date of Input Data Record yyyy mm dd Storage Time of Input Data Record hh mm Status Codes hexadecimal summation Valid Sampling Time hhh mm Total Sampling Time hhh mm or hhh mm Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 10 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Average Ambient Temperature C Average Ambient Pressure C Average Ambient RH Average Wind Speed km h Average Wind Velocity km h Average Wind Direction degrees Average Analog Input engineering units Average Analog Input 2 engineering units Average Analog Input 3 engineering units 10 6 ANALOG NPUT CONVERSIONS The User I O connector on the front panel of the Partisol Speciation Sampler Figure 10 4 allows the unit to receive three 0 5 VDC analog inputs from external sources The pin assignments of these inputs are as follows Input Channel 1
242. rom the body housing to the red cap and then place the denuder on the Kimwipe covered tray 9 Slide out the third HDPE spacer and the spring SECTION 4 CARTRIDGE HANDLING AND EXCHANGE Pace 4 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 10 Unclip the filter pack outlet port top rim of the ChemComb from the body housing Place the filter pack outlet port upside down on the glass spacer Figure 3 9 11 Remove the first plastic screen 12 With clean filter forceps remove the Teflon filter and place it on an inverted glass petri dish 13 Using a freshly cleaned razor blade or clean scissors make six cuts in the rigid disc at the edge of the Teflon filter While cutting the filter you may need to hold the it down with the forceps Place the cut filter inside the vial and tightly cap the vial 14 Transfer the appropriate label from the body housing to the vial 15 Remove the second plastic screen 16 Wipe the filter forceps and the petri dish clean with damp not wet Kimwipes 17 Using clean forceps remove the sodium carbonate coated filter and place it on top of the clean petri dish 18 Fold the filter so that it can be placed inside the sample vial Cap the vial tightly 19 Transfer the appropriate label from the body housing to the vial 20 Remove the third plastic screen 21 Clean the forceps and the petri dish as directed in step 16 22 Using clean forceps remove the c
243. rtisol Speciation Sampler stores one record of interval data every 5 minutes whenever the unit is turned on Revision A 000 Section 9 Viewing Stored Data The Partisol Speciation Sampler stores three types of data in its internal data logger filter data interval data and input data This information is stored in three separate circular buffers whose contents can be viewed on the screen of the sampler and or downloaded through the RS232 port Once these buffers are filled the oldest data points are replaced with the most recent information first in first out The following describes the three types of data stored internally in the hardware Filter Data Interval Data Input Data SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA Each record in this buffer contains information for a different collection filter exposed to the sample stream The sampler displays records from this buffer in the Filter Data Statistics screen and its subscreens Figures 9 2 to 9 6 These screens con tain information about the operation and status of the sampler while it sampled through each car tridge calculated averages of cartridge data recorded by the sampler anda list of the unit s recorded power failures during sampling The Partisol Speciation Sampler has a capacity of 240 records of filter data The sampler writes a new record of interval data every 5 minutes Each record contains the latest 5 minute average of the ambient temperature ambient pre
244. rtment Pace 8 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION Elec Heater Pump Temp Pump Heater Fan In Temp Pump Fan1 Pump Fan2 Pump1 Pump2 This field indicates whether the heater in the elec tronics compartment is currently switched on or off 293 This field contains the current temperature C of the sampler s pump compartment This field indicates whether the heater in the pump compartment is currently switched on or off This field contains the current temperature C of the sampler s fan inlet This field contains the current operational status of sample pump fan 1 This field contains the current operational status of sample pump fan 2 This field contains the current operational status of sample pump 1 This field contains the current operational status of sample pump 2 Pace 8 9 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank SECTION 8 OPERATING INFORMATION Pace 8 10 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Y The Partisol Speciation Sampler has a capacity of 240 filter data records 16 days of interval data records and 32 days of input data records Data are stored in a circular buffer on a first in first out basis Y The unit stores one record of filter data for each cartridge The Pa
245. s lt EDIT gt to edit the Cartridge ID field Scroll down to the first number in the series to be edited and enter the serial number of the cartridge in the Cartridge ID column press lt ENTER gt Press lt F3 Copy gt and follow the instruc tions in the display This will automatically increment the entered number for the remaining cartridges in the series Press lt F4 Insert gt to insert a number in the series or lt F5 Delete gt to delete a cartridge serial number If the ID number Pace 7 29 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler is 0 the sampler will automatically assign a cartridge identifier Invalid channels those channels that are not assigned to a group are hidden with asterisks NOTE If you select lt F5 Delete gt to delete a cartridge the unit will display a Warning Confirmation screen that will ask you to confirm the cartridge deletion Flow This parameter identifies the flow rate for each cartridge Use this field to set the flow rate for each cartridge in the cartridge list 7 4 TURNING OFF THE PARTISOL SPECIATION SAMPLER Follow the steps below to turn off the hardware e Ifthe device is zo in the Stop Operating Mode press lt RUN STOP gt to enter the Stop Operating Mode e Press the power switch on the front panel of the Partisol Speciation Sampler into its off 0 position Figure 7 23 Figure 7 23 Power button on the front panel of the P
246. s 1 2 2 In the ten s place the place holder directly to the left of the one s place of a hexadecimal number the power of 16 is 1 This is represented as 16 and its numerical value is 16 1 16 For example in the number H 742 the number 4 is in the ten s place The numerical value of the number 4 is expressed as 16 1 4 64 In the 100 s place the place holder directly to the left of the ten s place of a hexadecimal number the power of 16 is 2 This is represented as 16 and its numerical value is 16 16 256 For example in the number H 742 the number 7 is in the 100 s place The numerical value of the number 7 is expressed as 16 16 7 1 792 In the 1 000 s place the place holder directly to the left of the 100 s place of a hexadecimal number the power of 16 is 3 This is represented as 16 and its numerical value is 16 16 16 4 096 For example in the number H 32B7 the number 3 is in the 1 000 s place The numerical value of the number 3 is expressed as 16 16 16 3 12 288 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 24 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Example B 5 Convert H 2B4A to decimal form First multiply 2 by 16 16 represents the place holder occupied by the number 2 2 16 8 192 Next convert H B to decimal form H B 11 Next multiply 11 by 167 16 re
247. s in Edit Mode List List Bksp Start Sample Stop Sample The Start Sample parameter defines the time and date that the Partisol Speciation Sampler will begin sampling for the group number displayed in the Group field at the top of the screen When editing treat each part of the time and date as a separate field The Stop Sample parameter defines the time and date that the unit will stop sampling for the group number displayed in the Group field The sampler will not switch to the next group of cartridges at the Stop Sample time in row 1 but it will stop sampling until the Start Time in row 2 occurs When editing treat each part of the time and date asa separate field Inthe Time 2 sampling program the Start Time and Stop Time in row 1 must always be less than the Start Time and Stop Time in row 2 The Time 2 Sampling screen has the same lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt function keys as the Time Sampling Setup screen 7 3 4 ADVANCED SAMPLING SETUP SCREEN The Advanced Sampling Setup screen Figure 7 17 will display if ADV was selected as the Sample Definition Method in the Sample Setup screen Figure 7 4 The Advanced sampling program provides access to additional sample programming parameters beyond the standard time based sampling capabilities of the Partisol Speciation Sampler SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 21 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampl
248. s losses that can take place due to nitric acid and ammonia adsorption on the epoxy resin sometimes used in annular denuders The use of the same material throughout the denuder avoids cracking that can otherwise occur due to large temperature changes Honeycomb denuders are efficient collectors of inorganic gases such as HONO HNO and NH through the application of different coatings in the laboratory A denuder may be coated with a different gas adsorbing substance each time it is used Typically a sodium carbonate glycerol coating is used for the collection of acidic gases such as SO HONO and HNO A second denuder in series is often coated with a citric acid glycerol solution for the collection of basic gases such as NH Ion chromatography is often used as the analytical method SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 12 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 3 3 1 DENUDER PRE COATING PROCEDURE Follow these steps to wash and dry all new and used Honeycomb denuders before coating them for sampling 1 All new and used HCs must be thoroughly washed by flushing them with distilled water DW for at least 2 minutes Figure 3 19 Use a high velocity tap to flush the tubes of the denuders NOTE The flushing process is very important to minimize the background value If you still find high background values after flushing the denuder tubes you must flush the denuders for a longe
249. s screen Figure 9 4 The sampler remains in the same record of filter data when switching among filter data related screens The Cartridge Data Status Codes screen displays descriptions of all status codes recorded in the present record of cartridge filter data SECTION 9 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 9 5 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 9 4 Cartridge Data Status Codes screen Status Codes Rec 199 OK No Status Conditions Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat 9 1 4 CARTRIDGE DATA AVERAGES SCREEN Press lt F3 MoreDat gt when in the Cartridge Data Status Codes screen to enter the Cartridge Data Averages screen Figure 9 5 The sampler remains in the same record of filter data when switching among filter data related screens The Cartridge Data Averages screen displays the following information Stat The Stat field in the upper left hand corner of the screen shows the status conditions encountered dur ing sampling Rec The Rec field in the upper right hand corner of the screen contains the number of the current record Flow This field contains the minimum average and maxi mum flow rate l min WSpd This field contains the average wind speed km h recorded during the cartridge sampling period This NAT Averages Rec 199 Min Ave Max Average Flow 9 7 10 1 10 4 WSpd 0 0 AmbT 23 5 23 6 23 6 WVel 0 0 Pres 761 762 762 WDir 0 RH 85 8 87
250. side the shelter legs 28 Secure the roof to the shelter legs with four 4 10 32 x 3 8 screws Figures 2 32 and 2 33 The roof height is adjustable SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 18 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 32 Secure the roof to the shelter legs with m i the appropriate hardware Figure 2 33 Close up view of roof attachment 29 Remove the white leak plugs from the hose connections inside the shelter box Figure 2 34 Be sure to retain these leak plugs to use them during leak check procedures SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 19 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 34 Remove the white leak plugs from the hose connections 2 2 4 2 INSTALLING A 12 CHANNEL CHEMComB SHELTER Follow these steps to install the 12 channel ChemComb shelter 1 Check the ChemComb shelter assembly package for the following parts 4 shelter legs 1 bank valve mounting plate 3 ChemComb shelter boxes and 1 shelter roof 2 Slide each leg onto the studs on the top of the sampler Figures 2 35 and 2 36 Figure 2 35 Stud on top of unit SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 20 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 36 Shelter leg on stud 3 Using the hardware provided one 1 1 4 20 nut for each support post secure the shelter legs to t
251. son 1 2 0 aA BWN Re APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES lt Less Than Less Than or Equal Equal Greater Than or Equal Greater Than Not Equal Pace B 15 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler PRC 82 Current Password Protection 0 No Protection Enabled Regular Operation 1 Low Password Protection Enabled 2 High Password Protection Enabled PRC 147 Date Format 0 yy mm dd 1 mm dd yy 2 dd mm yy PRC 148 Time Format 0 Uses as Separator l Uses as Separator PRC 152 Default Filter Type ONDNAHBWN Ke 23 24 25 26 Oo NK MBS CHAANTOZEZMATTTOMVMOIOB pY O e APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 16 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler PRC 153 Sample Type 0 BASIC 24 hour Based Sampling 1 TIME Time Base Continuous Sampling 2 TIME2 Time Base Cont Samp two intervals 3 ADV Conditional Sampling 4 EPISOD Episodic Conditional Sampling 5 RS232 Sampler Operation to PRC PRC 170 Sampling Serial Control 0 No Command 1 Sample on Next Group 2 Sample on Previous Group 3 Sample on Current Group 4 Stop Sampling 5 Sampling Completed DONE Mode 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Not Used 9 Not Used 10 Not Used 11 Not Used 12 Not Used 13 Not Used 14 Not Used 15 Not Used 16 Sample on Group 1 17 Sample on Group 2 18 Sample on Group 3 19 Sample on Group 4 20 Sample on Group
252. sscctecrerssascqnanvemmeristanawderecucemnieee 14 2 APPENDIX A Overview OF PARTISOL MopeL 2300 SoFTWARE SCREENS A 1 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES e ssceeceeeeeeesneeeeeeeesssenneeeeeeeees B 1 B 1 Program Register Codes saiiciccsc ccsusnoctensarnivcoummmmeianrassdeonnsnennek B 2 B 2 PRC Values Defined by Codes cccccceceseseeerneeeees B 13 B 3 Deciphering Hexadecimal Status Codes cceeeeeeeees B 19 B 3 1 Place Holders ee B 19 B 3 2 Converting Decimal Numbers to Hexadecimal B 20 B 3 2 1 Converting Large Decimal Numbers to Hexadecimal sssini isansa B 20 Pace XII Revision A 001 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Table of Contents continued B 3 3 Converting Small Hexadecimal Numbers to Decimal B 23 B 3 4 Converting Large Hexadecimal Numbers to Decimal B 24 B 3 5 Adding Small Hexadecimal Numbers 0 B 27 B 3 6 Adding Large Hexadecimal Numbers 008 B 28 B 3 7 Deciphering Status Codes wccicsiis cet ccerccgtedientetnveeitcee B 30 APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION csseceeeceececeeecececeeeeeeeeneeeaes C 1 Gul AK PLotoCol arinena n e a a aa a a o aaa C 1 C 2 German Ambient Network Protocol aececi C 10 APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEW SYSTEM SOFTWARE sescseceeeeceeceeeceeeneeeeeeeenees D 1 D 1 Loading Software Into Flash Memory eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee D 1 APPENDIX E CA
253. ssembly 2 cceeeeeeeeeeeeneee 4 7 4 4 ChemComb Installation and Removal e seeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 4 4 1 Installing ChemComb Collars n 4 10 4 4 2 Installing ChemComb Cartridges ccecseeeeeeeeees 4 12 4 4 3 Removing ChemComb Cartridges eecseeeeeeeeeeeee 4 14 SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW cssceccccececcecesseeecceceeeesesaeaeeeeeseeseeeeeseesaaees 5 1 5 1 Turning On the Partisol Speciation Sampler 068 5 1 5 2 Title Screen sd vivsecenideeeccededussaneaesneeuseravieuveivexesecuxshacawsiesnesasexeedeee 5 2 5 3 MAIN SCRGGN eain laaa wah Maced wrens 5 2 5 4 Navigating Among ScreensS sewiasicincrsscasvyieaueiedeusiaswuseneusiannsnnsiee 5 6 5 5 Master MenU cccccccccccscesessseceecceeceeceeeeaeeeesceceeessesaeaeeesseeeees 5 9 5 6 PUI A ct Facet e E E eE EE S 5 10 SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION cscccccccccecceseeseeceececeeeecesaeeeeeaeeeceeeeeesesaeaees 6 1 6 1 Programming the Sampler ss sea aca teacerdbavinensinceesndaaseanitececanantaas 6 1 6 2 Post Sampling Verification and Data Retrieval 2 6 2 6 3 Sampling Verification c ceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeaeeesaeeaeeeaeeeeeeees 6 4 SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION ccccccccecceceeseeecceceeeeeeseeeueeeenes 7 1 7 1 Modes of Operation eccceeeeeeeeeeceecaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 7 1 Die System UD dacs tears arc cesta oa iec eee ante 7 4 7 2 1
254. ssure and average flow rate s The unit displays records from this buffer in the Interval Data screen Figure 9 7 The Partisol Speciation Sampler has a capacity of 16 days of interval data The sampler stores calculated averages of meteoro logical data and other information received through its analog input channels at the rate specified by the user in the Average Time field of the System Setup screen Section 7 2 1 The unit displays these stored values in the Input Data screen Figure 9 8 The sampler has a data storage interval of 30 minutes and a 32 day capacity of input data Pace 9 1 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Y Press lt F1 Rec gt and lt F2 Rec gt to move among stored records of informa tion Hold down these keys to repeat and acce erate the movement Figure 9 1 Main screen 9 1 CARTRIDGE DATA Data for each cartridge in the Partisol Speciation Sampler are stored as a separate record of filter data For readability the sampler splits the display of filter data records among five screens the Filter Data Statistics screen Figure 9 2 Filter Data screen Figure 9 3 Cartridge Data Status Codes screen Figure 9 4 Cartridge Data Averages screen Figure 9 5 and the Power Failures screen Figure 9 6 Press lt F5 Data gt when in the Main screen Figure 9 1 to access the Filter Data Statistics screen Figure 9 2 From this screen press lt F3 MoreDat gt re
255. t Averages Rec 199 Min Ave Max Average Flow 9 7 10 1 10 4 WSpd 0 0 AmbT 23 5 23 6 23 6 WVel 0 0 Pres 761 762 762 WDir 0 SRH 85 8 87 5 87 5 AI1 0 00 AI2 0 00 AI3 0 00 Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat Power Failures Rec 199 No power failures occurred Rec Rec MoreDat IntvDat APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure A 37 Interval Data Sreem Interval Time Data Rec 102 10 40 1999 11 04 Ambient Temp 22 5 C Ambient Pres 756 mmHg Flow A 0 0 l min Flow B 0 0 l min Flow C 0 0 l min Flow D 0 0 l min Rec Rec InptDat DwnLoad oe eee Stat OK Input Data Rec 16 Record Time 10 30 1999 11 04 Valid 000 00 AmbT 22 4 C Total 000 00 Pres 755 mmHg WSpd 0 1 km h SRH 27 7 WVel 0 1 km h AIl 0 00 WDir 0 deg AI2 0 00 AI3 0 00 Rec Rec FiltDat DwnLoad Figure A 39 Download Download Data Data screen Storage Filter Rec First Record 11 09 1999 11 02 0 Current Pointer 11 09 1999 11 02 0 Last Record 17 52 1999 11 02 199 First Ptr Ptr Last DwnLoad Function Keys in Browse Mode First 2 Ptr Ptr Last DwnLoad Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Revision A 000 Pace A 16 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Master
256. tact Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 RS485 A O Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign Figure A 17 Analog Output Setup screen Stat OK Variable 1 None 2 None 3 None A O Setup MinVal MaxVal 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Mode STOP Format 0 5 VDC 0 5 VDC 0 5 VDC RS232 RS485 A I Contact Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 RS485 A I Contact Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 7 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Revision A 000 Figure A 18 Contact Closure Setup screen Stat OK Contact Closure Setup Variable BitOp BitVal Comp CompVal 1 None AND 0 lt 0 00 2 None AND 0 lt 0 00 RS232 RS485 A I A O Function Keys in Browse Mode RS232 RS485 A I A O Function Keys in Edit Mode List List Bksp ChSign oo anor Site Identification rdi Id2 y Function Keys in Browse Mode Function Keys in Edit Mode Bksp A gms A gt APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SCREENS Pace A 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler P ere A Stat OK Password Setup Mode STOP Cur Lo Psw Cur Hi Psw New Lo Psw x x
257. te parts using the lt List gt and lt List gt soft function keys or through direct keypad entry Use the arrow keys on the keypad lt gt and lt gt to move from one part of the date variable to another To edit multiple parameters while remaining in the Edit Mode press the arrow keys on the keypad after making each change This moves the cursor to a new field and keeps the Partisol Speciation Sampler in its Edit Mode The following two keystrokes cause the software to leave the Edit Mode and return to the Browse Mode lt ENTER gt Changes made while in the Edit Mode are retained and the monitor returns to the Browse Mode lt ESC gt Changes made while in the Edit Mode are zor retained and the monitor returns to the Browse Mode The cursor reverts to its w der ine shape when the unit returns to the Browse Mode SECTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler This page left intentionally blank SEcTION 5 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 5 12 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Section 6 Sampler Operation This section explains how to program a sampling run retrieve data after a sampling run in the field and verify your sampler s performance characteristics 6 1 PROGRAMMING THE SAMPLER This section describes the procedures for programming the Partisol Speciation Sampler for a sampling run Refer to Section 5 f
258. th the batch code 3 3 3 DENUDER ExTRACTION PROCEDURE To minimize contamination of the denuders you must perform the extraction prcedure under the clean air hood and while wearing clean powder free gloves at all times The following equipment and materials are required for the Honeycomb denuder extraction procedure e Red polyethylene caps without holes e Red polyethylene caps each with a hole e A container to hold the used red polyethylene caps with no holes e A container to hold the used red polyethylene caps with holes e A 10 ml calibrated dispensing pipet bottle with fresh Milli Q water e A clean tray for the extracted denuders e Clean dry sample vials e A rack to store sample vials e Powder free vinyl gloves SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 25 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figures 3 36 left and 3 37 right Removing the red caps from both ends of a denuder Follow these steps to extract sampled gases from the Honeycomb denuders IMPORTANT Be sure to wear the powder free vinyl PVC gloves while extracting sampled gases from the denuders Rinse the gloves with Milli Q water before extraction and dry the gloves by wiping them with Kimwipes 1 Place powder free gloves on your hands Once you are wearing the gloves rinse your gloved hands with Milli Q water and dry the gloves by wiping them with Kimwipes Figure 3 26 2 Transfer
259. the first column of Figure 7 7 labeled AA at the bottom of the column the chart shows the flow channel and group configuration when you set a 12 channel unit to 3 groups of 4 flow channels In column AA Group 1 consists of flow channels 1 A 1D Figure 7 8 displays the flow channels and grouping configuration of columns AA DD described in Figure 7 7 SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 12 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 7 Channels per group chart for a 12 channel unit Figure 7 8 Top view of cartridges for a 12 channel unit with flow channels and groups highlighted CHANNELS PER GROUP Corresponding 4 3 2 1 flow channels 1 1 1 1 1A SE eS 1 1 2 3 1C A a es A e 2 o 2 2 3 5 2A E 2 2 3 6 2B 3 eae eer er ee eee eer ee e ee ee ee ee 2 2 0 4 8 2D rae cerns err tg ee tee See as decease agate ceca et in age cee VEE AA 3 3 5 9 3A 3 3 5 10 3B 3 3 6 11 3C 3 0 6 12 3D AA BB cc DD Group 3 Group 4 SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION Pace 7 13 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 7 9 Channels per CHANNELS PER GROUP i Corresponding group chart for a 4 channel 4 3 2 4 flow unit channels 1 1 1 1 A a5 1 1 1 2 B o2 6 amp 1 1 2 3 C Fe ge ee gee 1 0 2 4 D AA BB CC DD Figure 7 10 T
260. the greased area in the center of the impactor that has visible particulate matter buildup Replace the scraped out grease with new grease from the tube and repeat steps 3 7 After every 4 weeks of use completely clean each impactor plate following the instructions in Section 3 2 6 2 and prepare the impac tors for further use by following the instructions in Section 3 2 6 3 3 2 7 Grass Spacers AND HDPE Spacers You must thoroughly rinse new glass Figure 3 15 and HDPE spacers Figure 3 16 with Milli Q water Allow them to dry covered with Kimwipes in room air Store the clean dry glass and HDPE spacers in a clean ziplock bag NOTE If it is necessary to dry the glass and HDPE spacers rapidly rinse them with methanol and allow them to dry on the Kimwipe covered tray SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 11 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 17 left Side view of Honeycomb denuder Figure 3 18 right Top view of Honeycomb denuder 3 3 HoneEyYcoms DENUDER COATING AND EXTRACTION PROCEDURES Honeycomb denuders HCs Figures 3 17 and 3 18 contain a large internal surface area They are 47 mm in diameter and 38 mm long Their internal surface area of 508 cm is made possible by 212 hexagonal flow channels that are 2 mm on a side The entire ChemComb cartridge is less than 30 cm long Honeycomb denuders are made completely of glass to avoid ga
261. the label on the top of the red cap to a clean sample vial Be sure to hold the denuder s outer surface with your thumb and middle finger 3 Remove the red caps from both ends of the denuder Figures 3 36 and 3 37 Wipe the outer surface of the denuder with Kimwipes moistened with Milli Q water Figures 3 38 and 3 39 SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 26 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figures 3 38 Wiping the outside of the denuder with Kimwipes moistened with Milli Q water Figures 3 39 Hold the denuder between your thumb and finger Do not touch the ends of the denuder with your fingers SEcTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 27 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 4 5 6 7 8 9 Place a new clean dry red cap that does not have a hole in it on one end of the denuder Avoid using excessive force when recap ping the denuder because the edge of the red cap may distort when you push it onto the end of the denuder This will cause the extracting solution to leak out of the caps during the extraction process When the denuder is uncapped be sure to hold it only by its outer surface Do not allow your fingers to touch either end of the denuder while it is uncapped Using the dispensing pipette bottle add 10 ml of Milli Q water to the open end of the denuder Figure 3 2
262. the unit the unit will add the repeat time to the last group of cartridges start time and continue sampling For example if the Group 1 cartridges were scheduled to sample from noon to midnight and the continu ous sampling feature is turned on then the unit will add the repeat time to the Group start time and continue sampling on the next group Group 2 with the same parameters set for Group 1 IMPORTANT If you turn on the Continuous Sampling feature you must remove the cartridges after their sampling runs are complete and replace them with new cartridges If you do not remove the cartridges after sampling and replace them with new cartridges the sampler will finish its sam pling run sample on all cartridges installed on the unit and then begin a new sampling run on the same cartridges System Check SECTION 7 SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION When this feature is turned on the unit will run a system check of the pumps valves flows and other system equip ment for the first 5 minutes of the sampling flow on each group of cartridges During the sampling check the unit will not consistently pull an air stream through the first cartridge of each group Therefore the total volume recorded for the Pace 7 10 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 7 2 4 first cartridge will be less than the total volume recorded for each remaining cartridge Group Setup SCREEN The Group
263. tisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 3 25 Denuder installed on the manifold of a clean air system Make sure that all components of the system are connected properly Lay out the plastic manifolds on clean paper towels Wipe the manifold ports with Kimwipes moistened with Milli Q water to remove any sodium ion which may have been deposited during previous coating Connect the manifold inlets to the output tube from the clean air system To preserve the capacity of the system turn on the pumps to start the air flow through the system on y when the denuders are ready to be dried Turn the system off as soon as drying is complete The following equipment and materials must be readily available during the denuder drying procedure e Container with red polyethylene caps no hole e Container with red polyethylene caps with hole e Container for used red polyethylene caps with no hole e Container for used red polyethylene caps with hole e Container with clean caps for tapping the coated denuders e Container for used caps e 10 ml dispensing pipette bottle with fresh coating solution e Beaker for the used coating solution e Tray with clean capped denuders to be coated e Clean tray for the dried coated denuders e Clean tray for the labeled red caps to put back on the denuders when the coating has dried e Powder free vinyl gloves SECTION 3 DENUDER FILTER AND CARTRIDGE PREPARATION Pace 3 17 Revision A 000 Ope
264. tored data An uninterrupted data down load will transfer all data records from the position of the current pointer to the last stored record Pressing lt F5 DwnLoad gt from this screen will download the selected data type Filter Interval or Input data from the position of the current pointer to the last record of stored data Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 8 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 10 3 Format oF FiLter Data RECORDS Each record of filter data contains the comma delimited data fields shown below Records are separated from each other by the carriage return ASCII 013 and line feed ASCII 010 characters Each filter data record contains Y The sampler includes these power interruption fields only for the number of events that occurred up to 10 Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Channel Number 2 character string Cartridge ID 7 character string Cartridge Type 1 character string Status Codes hexadecimal summation Set Start Date yyyy mm dd Set Start Time hh mm Actual Start Date yyyy mm dd Actual Start Time hh mm Set Stop Date yyyy mm dd Set Stop Time hh mm Actual Stop Date yyyy mm dd Set Stop Time hh mm Total Sampling Time hhh mm Valid Sampling Time hhh mm Minimum Flow volumetric l min Average Flow volumetric l min Maximum Flow volumetric l min Flow Coef of Variation
265. tput parameters depending on which protocol that you are using as follows a Storage protocol Go to the screen that identifies the storage buffer that you want to download You can select the Filter Data screen Interval Data screen or the Input Data screen Figure Each screen has the lt F5 DwnLoad gt button If you want to download data from all three storage buffers you must perform the data download from each screen For example if you want to download from the Filter Data screen press lt F5 DwnLoad gt while in that screen In the Download Data screen Figure 10 6 the Storage field will indicate that the storage buffer being downloaded is the Filter storage buffer Choose the record at which you Section 10 Data INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 10 6 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler would like the unit to begin downloading To select the beginning record press lt F2 Ptr gt or lt F3 Ptr gt This will change the Current Pointer field Once the correct beginning record is indicated in the Current Pointer field press lt F5 Start gt The unit will download all the data in filter storage buffer beginning at the record number indicated in the Current Pointer field b RealTime protocol From the RS232 Setup screen press lt F3 SetPRC gt to go to the RS232 RealTime Data screen Figure 10 5 In this screen select the time interval at which you want the data to download during sampli
266. ual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 18 Slide the nuts located near the top of each pipe up the pipes and finger tighten them Figure 2 52 Figure 2 52 Finger tighten the nuts at the top of the pipes 19 Using a crescent wrench tighten each nut 1 4 turn past finger tight Figure 2 53 Figure 2 53 Tighten each nut 1 4 turn past finger tight with a crescent wrench SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 29 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 20 Ensure that the screw holes on the back of the bank valve line up with the holes in the bank valve mounting plate Figure 2 54 Figure 2 54 Ensure that the screw holes line up with the holes in the bank valve mounting plate 21 Using two 2 1 4 ID x 1 2 OD sealing washers and two 2 1 4 20 x 1 2 socket screws secure the bank valve to the bank valve mounting plate Figures 2 55 2 56 and 2 57 Figure 2 55 A 2 1 4 20 x 1 2 socket screw left and a 1 4 ID x 1 2 OD sealing washer right SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Pace 2 30 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 2 56 Slide the sealing washer onto the screw before using it to secure the bank valve to its mounting plate Figure 2 57 Secure the bank valve to the bank valve mounting plate 22 Inside the additional pipe clipped to pipe A there are three small hoses labeled 1
267. utine operation Follow these steps to verify sampler performance characteristics prior to starting a sampling run 1 Ensure that cartridges are installed on the unit Maintenance tasks and performance verification should be performed while in the Stop Mode Press lt MENU gt to enter the Master Menu screen Section 14 2 While in the Master Menu screen press the down arrow 1 until Service Mode is selected Press lt ENTER gt The unit then will display the Service Mode Confirmation screen Section 14 3 Press lt F3 Yes gt The unit will now display the Service Menu screen Figure 6 1 Service Menu gt System Maintenance Routines Manual Motion Tests Calibration Low Level System Info Download System Log Exit Service Mode Audit SysChck SECTION 6 SAMPLER OPERATION Pace 6 4 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler 4 While in the Service Menu screen press the down arrow J until gt System Maintenance Routines is selected Figure 6 1 Press lt F2 SysChck gt The unit then will display the System Check screen Figure 6 2 Figure 6 2 System Check screen Service Mode Stat OK System Check Mode SVC Pump OFF Bank Flow A B C D PumpV OFF 1 OFF Set 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VacVt OFF 2 OFF LkChk OFF 3 OFF Cur 0 10 0 17 0 12 0 10 Pres Amb 756 Vac 000 Start Function Keys in Browse Mode Start Functi
268. viewing data 6 2 9 1 voltage 10 11 voltage line IV volume 1 9 3 35 8 5 9 5 W Wait Mode 5 2 7 3 warranty U S II wind direction 7 24 8 8 speed 8 8 velocity 8 8 wind direction range setting 7 24 wind vane anemometer 8 7 Revision A 000
269. ys reverts to its unprotected state The user may change the low and high passwords in the Password Setup screen Figure 11 2 To reach this screen from the Main screen press lt F3 System gt and then lt F3 Passwd gt After entering this screen the user can move the cursor only to the fields labeled Cur Lo Psw and Cur Hi Psw To change the low password enter the value of the current low password in the Cur Lo Psw field while in the Edit Mode The unit then provides access to the New Lo Psw and Confirm Lo fields in which the user must now enter the zew low password twice Press lt ENTER gt to leave the Edit Mode and to save your new low password The sampler should beep twice to indicate that the password has been successfully changed SECTION 11 PAssworD PROTECTION Pace 11 3 Revision A 000 Operating Manual Partisol Model 2300 Speciation Sampler Figure 11 5 Title screen Ifyou do not enter anew low password correctly the unit will not beep when you press lt ENTER gt and the cursor will move back to the line labeled New Lo Psw Press lt ESC gt to leave the Password Setup screen in case of difficulties To change the high password enter the value of the current high password in the Cur Hi Psw field while in the Edit Mode The unit then provides access to the New Hi Psw and Confirm Hi fields in which the user must now enter the zew high password twice Press lt ENTER gt to leave the Edit Mode and to s

Partisol 2300 - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents